Skip to main content

Full text of "Quain's Elements of anatomy"

See other formats


MEDICAL 


John  Marshall  Williamson 
Memorial 


QUAIN'S      > 

ELEMENTS    OF    ANATOMY 


EDITED    BY 

EDWARD    ALBERT    SCHAFER,    F.R.S. 

PROFESSOR    OF    PHYSIOLOGY    AND    HISTOLOGY    IN    UNIVERSITY    COLLEGE,     LONDON, 

• 

AND 

GEORGE     DANCER     THANE, 

PROFESSOR     OF     ANATOMY     IN     UNIVERSITY     COLLEGE,      LONDON. 


IN     THREE     VOLUMES. 

. 

APPENDIX. 

SUPERFICIAL    AND    SURGICAL   ANATOMY. 
BY    PROFESSOR     G.      D.     THANE, 

AND 

PROFESSOR    R.    J.    GODLEE,    M.S. 

ILLUSTRATED     BY     29     ENGRAVINGS. 

4 

Cent!)    <£Uttton. 


LONGMANS,     GREEN,     AND     CO. 

LONDON,  NEW  YORK,  AND  BOMBAY. 
1896. 

[All  rights  reserved.] 


LONDON  : 
BRADBURY,  AGNEW,  &  CO.  I.D.,  PRINTERS,  WHITEFRI ARS. 


CONTENTS   OF  APPENDIX. 


PAGE 

SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY  OF  THE  HEAD  AND 

NECK                .        .        .       ...  ,     .  i 

The  Head  and  Face     .         .         .         .  i 

The  Neck 16 

SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY  OF  THE  TRUNK     .     19 
The  Chest      .         ...         .         .     .     19 

The  Abdomen     .         .        .  .22 

The  Back       .         .....     27 

TABLE    OF   LEVELS    OF  STRUCTURES    IN 
-  THE  TRUNK          .        .        .        .        .32 

SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY    OF    THE  UPPER 

LIMB         .        .        .        .  .     .     35 

The  Shoulder      .         .         .-  .         .35 

The  Arm        ...  •     •     35 

The  Elbow          .         .        .  .         .37 

The  Forearm           .         .         .  .     .     38 


SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY  OF   THE   UPPER 
LIMB — continued, 

The  Wrist  and  Hand  .         .         .         .39 

SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY  OF    THE    LOWER 

LIMB         .  42 

The  Hip     ......     42 

The  Thigh 43 

The  Knee   .         .         .         .         .         .     45 

The  Leg         .         .'       .         .         .     .     47 

The  Ankle  and  Foot  ....     48 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  GROIN  :  HERNIA  .  .  50 
Inguinal  Hernia  .  .  .  .  51 
Femoral  Hernia  .  ...  ..57 

THE  PERINEUM  OF  THE  MALE   .         .        .62 

EXAMINATION  OF  THE  PELVIC  VISCERA     .     65 

INDEX  ." 67 


SUPERFICIAL  AND  TOPOGRAPHICAL 
ANATOMY. 

BY  G.  D.  THANE  AND  R.  J.  GODLEE. 


IN  this  section  will  be  comprised,  1,  a  brief  account  of  the  external  conforma- 
tion of  the  body,  including  the  relation  of  its  anatomical  constituents  to  its  surface 
forms,  and  the  mode  of  determining  the  position  of  deep-seated  organs,  such  as  the 
viscera,  large  vessels,  and  other  important  parts  ;  and  2,  the  topographical  and 
surgical  anatomy  of  the  inguinal  and  perineal  regions. 

SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 

THE     HEAD    AND     FACE. 

The  upper  part  of  the  cranium  is  but  thinly  covered  by  the  scalp,  and  the 
form  of  the  head  is  almost  exactly  that  of  the  skull.  The  bones  can  be  readily 
examined  by  passing  the  hand  over  the  head,  and  the  following  parts  are  thus  to  be 
distinguished  : — In  the  middle  line  behind  is  the  external  occipital  protuberance, 
from  which  the  superior  curved  line  proceeds  outwards  on  each  side  towards  the 
mastoid  process  ;  below  this  line  the  bone  is  obscured  by  the  overlying  muscles, 
except  in  the  middle  line,  where  the  external  occipital  crest  may  sometimes  be  felt 
at  the  bottom  of  the  nuchal  furrow  between  the  posterior  muscles  of  the  neck. 
Above  the  occipital  protuberance,  the  lambdoid  suture  is  often  to  be  followed  as  a 
slight  depression  on  the  surface,  owing  to  the  projection  of  the  occipital  bone 
beyond  the  hinder  part  of  the  parietals.  The  lambda,  corresponding  to  the  central 
and  highest  point  of  this  depression,  is  about  two  and  a  half  inches  (6 — 7  cm.) 
above  the  external  occipital  protuberance.  Above  the  lambda  there  is  usually  a 
well-marked  flattened  surface  at  the  region  of  the  obelion  (see  Osteology,  p.  83)  ; 
and  in  front  of  this  again  the  parietal  bones  often  form  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
their  junction  a  broad  longitudinal  ridge,  in  which  the  position  of  the  sagittal 
suture  is  indicated  by  a  slight  median  depression. 

At  the  fore  part  of  the  lateral  region  of  the  head  the  temporal  crest  of  the 
frontal  bone  becomes  prominent,  and  leads  down  to  the  external  angular  process, 
the  junction  of  which  with  the  malar  bone  is  marked  by  a  distinct  depression. 
Below  this  the  outline  of  the  malar  bone  can  be  followed,  and  from  the  hinder  part 
of  the  latter  the  finger  passes  along  the  zygoma  to  its  base  in  front  of  the  ear. 
Higher  up  on  the  side  of  the  head  the  lower  temporal  line  on  the  parietal  bone  is 
frequently  to  be  recognised,  indicating  the  extent  upwards  of  the  temporal  muscle. 
The  margin  of  the  orbit  can  be  felt  in  its  whole  extent,  and  is  found  to  be 
interrupted  above,  somewhat  internal  to  the  centre,  by  the  supraorbital  notch, 
unless  this  be  converted  into  a  foramen,  when  it  is  scarcely  perceptible.  Above  the 
orbit  is  the  variable  superciliary  ridge,  small  in  the  female  and  absent  in  the  child  ; 
and  above  this  on  the  forehead  is  the  frontal  eminence,  which,  like  the  parietal 
eminence,  is  most  marked  during  childhood.  In  the  infant,  the  anterior  fontanelle 
is  felt  as  a  lozenge-shaped  depression,  leading  forwards  to  the  interval  between  the 


2  SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF   THE    HEAD    AND   NECK. 

two  frontal,  and  backwards  to  that  between  the  two  parietal  bones  ;  the  latter 
interval  conducts  to  the  triradiate  posterior  fontanelle,  the  lateral  limbs  of  which 
are  continued  downwards  along  the  upper  margins  of  the  occipital  bone. 


Fig.  1. — FRONT  VIEW  OF  SKULL,  SHOWING  EXTENT  OF  CEREBRUM,  AIR-SPACES,  EXIT  OF  NERVES,  &c.     f 

(G.  D.  T.) 

The  outline  of  the  cerebrum  is  shown  in  reel,  and  the  position  of  the  superior  longitudinal  sinus  in 
blue.  The  frontal  sinus  with  the  infundibulum  and  the  maxillary  antrum  are  indicated  by  patches  of 
shading,  and  the  nasal  duct  with  the  lachrymal  sac  by  a  dotted  line.  The  following  letters  refer  to  the 
nerves  : — s  o,  supraorbital ;  s  T,  supratrochlear  ;  i  T,  infratrochlear  ;  L,  lachrymal ;  N,  nasal  ;  i  o,  infra- 
orbital  ;  M  a,  malar ;  B,  buccal ;  M  e,  mental. 

The  frontal  sinuses  are  contained  in  the  lower  part  of  the  frontal  bone,  above 
the  root  of  the  nose  and  the  inner  ends  of  the  eyebrows.  In  extent  and  capacity 
they  vary  greatly  in  different  individuals  ;  as  a  rule  they  are  larger  in  the  male 
than  in  the  female,  and  are  absent  before  the  seventh  year  of  life.  In  the  adult 


FRONTAL    SINUSES.  3 

they  may  extend  upwards  as  far  as  the  frontal  eminence,  or  fully  two  inches 
above  the  naso-frontal  suture,  and  outwards  over  the  orbit  into  the  base  of 
the  external  angular  process  ;  or  they  may  exist  only  as  slight  recesses  in  the 
nasal  portion  of  the  bone.  The  dimensions  of  the  sinuses  are  not  necessarily 
related  to  the  degree  of  prominence  of  the  glabella  and  superciliary  ridges, 
which  -are  sometimes  strongly  marked  without  being  excavated  by  the  air- 
spaces ;  while  on  the  other  hand  large  sinuses  not  unfrequently  co-exist  with  a 
comparatively  flat  lower  frontal  region,  having  apparently  been  formed  by  the 
recession  of  the  inner  table  of  the  bone.  The  right  and  left  sinuses  are  separated 
by  a  thin  osseous  partition,  which  is  seldom  defective  ;  but  they  are  often  unequally 
developed,  so  that  the  septum  deviates  strongly  from  the  median  plane.  In  extreme 
cases  one  sinus  may  extend  equally,  or  nearly  so,  in  both  halves  of  the  frontal  bone, 
the  cavity  of  the  opposite  side  being  either  rudimentary  or  wanting.  The  lower 
part  of  the  sinus  tapers  into  the  infundibulum,  a  narrow  passage  which  leads  down- 
wards and  backwards  through  the  fore  part  of  the  lateral  mass  of  the  ethmoid  into 
the  middle  meatus  of  the  nose.  The  infundibulum  is  deeply  placed  behind  the 

right  frontal  sinus 

':«-•'••: '•• 

'  •  \  .. 


passage  into  right  left  frontal  sinus 

nasal  cavity. 

Fig.   2.  — LOWEK    PORTION    OF  A  FRONTAL  BONE,    SHOWING    UNSYMMETRICAL  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE 

FRONTAL  SINUSES.     (From  a  photograph  by  G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     (GK  D.  T.) 

nasal  process  of  the  superior  maxillary  bone,  and  near  the  inner  wall  of  the  orbit 
(</.  Osteology,  fig.  66)  ;  its  termination  in  the  middle  meatus  is  about  on  a  level 
with  the  palpebral  fissure. 

Vessels  and  nerves  of  the  scalp. — The  supraorbital  nerve  and  artery  pass 
almost  vertically  upwards  from  the  supraorbital  notch,  and  more  internally  the 
frontal  artery  and  supratrochlear  nerve  ascend  over  the  margin  of  the  orbit,  while 
the  large  frontal  vein  descends  in  a  similar  position  to  the  root  of  the  nose. 
Posteriorly,  the  occipital  vessels  and  great  occipital  nerve  run  upwards  to  the  vertex, 
entering  the  scalp  somewhat  internal  to  a  point  midway  between  the  external 
occipital  protuberance  and  the  mastoid  process.  The  superficial  temporal  artery 
crosses  the  base  of  the  zygoma  immediately  in  front  of  the  ear,  and  its  anterior 
branch  can  frequently  be  seen,  especially  in  old  persons,  running  upwards  and 
f 01  wards  with  a  tortuous  course  over  the  fore  part  of  the  temporal  muscle  towards 
the  forehead. 

Endocranial  blood-vessels; — In  contact  with  the  inner  surface  of  the  cranial 
wall  the  superior  longitudinal  sinus  is  directed  backwards  along  the  middle  line, 
extending  from  the  lower  part  of  the  forehead  to  the  external  occipital  protuberance. 

B   2 


4  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 

It  commonly  deviates  a  little  to  one  side,  more  frequently  the  right,  especially  in 
its  hindmost  part,  as  it  descends  over  the  upper  portion  of  the  occipital  bone  to  its 
termination.  From  the  latter  spot  the  lateral  sinus  runs  outwards  and  forwards, 
describing  a  slight  curve  with  its  convexity  upwards,  to  the  back  of  the  ear  on  a 
level  with  the  upper  margin  of  the  external  auditory  meatus,  and  then  turns  down- 


Fig.  3. — SIDE  VIEW  OF  SKULL,  SHOWING  THE  COURSE  OF  THE  MIDDLE   MENINGEAL  ARTERY,  LATERAL 
SINUS,  &c.     (From  a  photograph  by  G.  W.  U.  Waters.)     f.     (G.  D.  T.) 

The  meningeal  artery  is  represented  in  red  and  the  lateral  sinus  in  blue  :  the  position  of  these  was 
ascertained  by  drilling  holes  from  the  interior  of  the  skull.  The  shaded  area  above  and  behind  the 
external  auditory  meatus  indicates  the  position  of  the  epitympanic  recess  and  mastoid  antrum.  The 
broken  line  represents  the  inferior  limit  of  the  cerebral  hemisphere  as  traced  on  the  surface  of  the 
skull,  t  f  t  indicate  the  points  of  intersection  of  vertical  and  horizontal  lines  respectively  one  inch, 
one  inch  and  a  half,  and  two  inches  behind  the  external  angular  process  of  the  frontal  bone,  and  above 
the  upper  border  of  the  zygoma. 

wards,  following  a  course  directed  to  the  tip  of  the  mastoid  process  as  far  as  a  point 
about  5  mm.  beyond  the  level  of  the  lower  border  of  external  auditory  meatus.  In 
the  first  part  of  its  course  the  sinus  usually  lies  altogether  above  a  line  drawn 
transversely  from  the  external  occipital  protuberance  to  the  centre  of  the  opening  of 
the  ear,  and  the  highest  part  of  its  arch,  where  the  sinus  crosses  the  postero-inferior 


CRANIO-CEREBRAL   TOPOGRAPHY.  5 

angle  of  the  parietal  bone,  is  from  15  to  20  mm.  (in  extreme  cases  even  25  mm.) 
above,  and  somewhat  external  to  the  mid-point  of,  this  line.  The  distance  of  the 
descending  part  of  the  sinus  from  the  posterior  wall  of  the  auditory  canal  is  usually 
from  10  to  12  mm.,  but  may  be  as  little  as  2  mm.  The  course  of  this  part  of  the 
sinus  corresponds  roughly  to  the  line  of  reflection  of  the  skin  from  the  pinna  to  the 
head  posteriorly  (Birmingham).  The  depth  of  the  sinus  from  the  surface  of  the 
mastoid  varies  from  1  to  15  mm.,  with  an  average  of  7  mm.  ;  and  its  breadth 
ranges  from  5  to  15  mm.  The  sinus  is  often  much  wider  in  its  mastoid  than  in  its 
occipital  segment.  The  right  sinus  is  generally  larger,  projects  more  forwards,  and 
approaches  nearer  to  the  surface  than  the  left.  The  lateral  sinus  may  be  exposed 
by  an  opening  in  the  bone  immediately  below  the  anterior  part  of  the  parieto 
mastoid  suture,  or  having  its  centre  25  mm.  (1  inch)  behind  the  highest  point  of 
the  orifice  of  the  osseous  external  auditory  meatus. 

The  anterior  and  larger  division  of  the  middle  meningeal  artery  runs  upwards 
and  backwards  within  the  skull  in  the  fore  part  of  the  temporal  region,  and  would 
be  reached  at  points  equal  distances,  one  inch,  one  inch  and  a  half,  and  in  most 
cases  two  inches,  above  the  zygoma  and  behind  the  external  angular  process  of  the 
frontal  bone.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the  vessel  in  this  part  of  its  course  is 
lodged  in  a  deep  groove,  sometimes  a  canal,  on  the  antero-inferior  angle  of  the 
parietal  bone.  The  ramifications  of  the  posterior  division  of  the  artery  are  variable 
in  number  and  position. 

Craiiio-cerebral  topography. — Extent  of  the  cerebral  hemisphere. — The  upper 
margin  of  the  cerebral  hemisphere  extends  from  the  lower  part  of  the  glabella  nearly 
to  the  external  occipital  protuberance.  It  does  not  quite  reach  the  middle  line, 
being  separated  from  its  fellow  by  an  interval  which  corresponds  to  the  superior 
longitudinal  sinus,  and  like  that  increases  in  breadth  posteriorly,  where  it  measures 
fully  1  cm.  Owing  to  the  lateral  deviation  of  the  sinus,  the  margin  of  the  hemi- 
sphere commonly  approaches  nearer  to  the  middle  line  on  the  left  side  than  on  the 
right.  Beiow  the  sinus  the  mesial  surfaces  of  the  two  hemispheres  are  nearly  in 
contact,  being  separated  only  by  the  thickness  of  the  falx  cerebri.  Inferiorly,  the 
cerebral  hemisphere  reaches  in  front  nearly  to  the  eyebrow,  at  the  side  to  the  upper 
margin  of  the  zygoma,  and  behind  to  the  superior  curved  line  of  the  occipital  bone. 
The  lower  limit  of  the  hemisphere  is  more  precisely  indicated  by  marking  out  its 
lateral  margin,  which  consists  of  two  parts — frontal  and  occipito-temporal.  The 
frontal  part  begins  internally  close  above  the  naso-frontal  suture  (which  is  felt  at 
the  bottom  of  the  depression  below  the  glabella),  rises  in  an  arch  as  it  passes  out- 
wards, being  about  8  mm.  above  the  centre  of  the  supraorbital  border  of  the  frontal 
bone,  and  crosses  the  temporal  crest  just  below  the  deepest  point  of  the  hollow 
formed  by  the  frontal  bone  immediately  above  the  external  angular  process.  From 
the  temporal  crest  the  frontal  margin  descends  slightly  in  the  fore  part  of  the 
temporal  fossa  to  a  spot  about  25  mm.  behind  the  external  angular  process,  where 
it  meets  the  foremost  part  of  the  temporal  margin  in  a  receding  angle,  which 
corresponds  to  the  stem  of  the  fissure  of  Sylvius.  The  occipito-temporal  division  of 
the  lateral  margin  begins  posteriorly  at  the  occipital  pole  of  the  hemisphere,  which 
is  placed  a  little  (5  to  15  mm.)  above  and  outside  the  external  occipital  protuber- 
ance, and  then  follows  the  arch  of  the  lateral  sinus,  as  described  above,  to  the  back 
of  the  ear.  Crossing  here  the  supramastoid  crest,  the  margin  is  continued 
forwards  about  6  mm.  (varying  from  3  to  9  mm.)  above  the  roof  of  the  external 
auditory  meatus,  and  then  on  a  level  with  the  upper  border  of  the  zygomatic  arch 
for  about  the  posterior  half  of  its  length.  Then  curving  gradually  upwards,  the 
border  reaches  its  foremost  point,  corresponding  to  the  temporal  pole  of  the  hemi- 
sphere, about  20  mm.  above  the  zygoma  and  15  mm.  behind  the  external  angular 


a 


STJPEKFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    HEAD   AND   NECK. 


process,  and  finally  recedes  slightly  to  meet  the  end  of  the  frontal  margin  at  the 
Sylvian  notch. 

Relations  of  the  cerebral  fissures  and  convolutions  to  the  cranial  wall. — The  point 
of  division  of  the  Sylvian  fissure  is  situated  in  the  pterion,  beneath  or  very  near  the 
spheno-parietal  suture  towards  its  posterior  end.  From  this  spot  the  posterior  limb 
of  the  fissure  runs  backwards  and  somewhat  upwards,  at  first  following  the  line  of 
the  squamous  suture,  and  then  crossing  the  temporal  area  of  the  parietal  bone  as  far 


Fig.  4. — SIDE   VIEW   OF   THE   SKULL,    SHOWING 

WALL.     §. 


THK     RELATIONS     OP     THE     BRAIN     TO     THE     CRANIAL 

(G.  D.  T.) 


as  the  inferior  temporal  line,  beyond  which  its  superior  terminal  branch  ascends  for 
a  short  distance  beneath  the  parietal  eminence.  In  the  child  the  posterior  limb  of 
the  fissure  is  distinctly  above  the  line  of  the  squamous  suture.  The  anterior 
ascending  branch  of  the  Sylvian  fissure  runs  from  the  hinder  part  of  the  spheno- 
parietal  suture  upwards  and  somewhat  forwards,  crossing  obliquely  the  lower  end  of 
the  coronal  suture  ;  and  the  horizontal  branch  is  directed  forwards  in  the  line  of 
the  spheno-parietal  suture.  The  parieto-occipital  fissure  is  placed  opposite  the 
lambda,  or  often  rather  above  that  point,  especially  in  young  subjects.  The  fissure 
of  Rolando  is  wholly  beneath  the  parietal  bone,  its  upper  end  being  from  4  to  5  cm., 


CRANIO-CEREBRAL   TOPOGRAPHY.  7 

and  its  lower  end  about  3  cm.,  behind  the  coronal  suture.  The  superior  precentral 
sulcus  is  from  2  to  3  cm.  behind  the  upper  part  of  the  coronal  suture  ;  and  the 
inferior  precentral  sulcus  is  a  short  distance  (1  to  2  cm.)  behind  the  lower  part  of 
the  same  suture.  The  inferior  frontal  sulcus  about  corresponds  to  the  stephanion 
and  the  temporal  crest  of  the  frontal  bone.  The  intraparietal  fissure  is  very  variable 
in  position  :  its  ascending  or  postcentral  portions  are  approximately  parallel  to  and 
about  15  mm.  behind  the  fissure  of  Kolando  ;  while  its  longitudinal  portion  runs 
backwards,  with  a  slight  inclination  inwards,  just  above  the  parietal  eminence,  and 
at  an  average  distance  of  45  mm.  from  the  median  line  anteriorly,  35  mm. 
posteriorly  opposite  the  lambda.  The  parallel  fissure  lies  mainly  beneath  the  upper 
part  of  the  squamous  and  the  hinder  part  of  the  temporal  area  of  the  parietal  bone, 
but  its  posterior  end  crosses  the  temporal  lines  and  runs  upwards  for  a  short  distance 
in  the  parietal  lobe  of  the  hemisphere  under  the  superior  division  of  the  parietal 
bone  :  its  position  in  the  temporal  part  of  its  extent  is  indicated  approximately  by  a 
line  drawn  from  the  marginal  tubercle  of  the  malar  bone  to  the  lambda.  In  the 
child,  owing  in  great  measure  to  the  relatively  small  size  of  the  squamous  part  of  the 
temporal  bone,  the  parallel  fissure  appears  to  be  placed  much  higher,  often  reaching 
the  level  of  the  squamous  suture. 

From  the  foregoing  determination  of  the  situation  of  the  fissure  of  Kolando  and 
precentral  sulci,  it  follows  that  the  ascending  frontal  and  the  bases  of  the  upper, 
middle,  and  lower  frontal  convolutions  are  placed  beneath  the  anterior  third  of  the 
parietal  bone.  The  main  parts  of  the  superior  and  middle  frontal  convolutions 
correspond  to  the  frontal  region  of  the  frontal  bone,  and  of  this  area  the  superior 
frontal  convolution  may  be  said  to  occupy  rather  less  than  the  inner  half,  and  the 
middle  frontal  convolution  rather  more  than  the  outer  half.  The  centre  of  the 
frontal  eminence  is  commonly  over  the  middle  convolution.  The  apex  of  the  pars 
triangularis  of  the  inferior  frontal  convolution  corresponds  to  the  antero-inferior 
angle  of  the  parietal  bone  ;  and  the  pars  orbitalis  is  covered  by  the  temporal  division 
of  the  frontal  bone  and  the  upper  end  of  the  great  wing  of  the  sphenoid.  The 
whole  of  the  parietal  lobe  is  under  cover  of  the  parietal  bone,  the  parietal  eminence 
corresponding  to  some  part  of  the  supramarginal  convolution  ;  while  the  occipital 
lobe  occupies  the  cerebral  division  of  the  occipital  bone,  and  sometimes  extends  slightly 
beneath  the  adjacent  part  of  the  parietal  bone.  The  temporal  lobe  lies  for  the  most 
part  beneath  the  squamous  division  of  the  temporal  bone  and  the  postero-inferior  fourth 
of  the  parietal  bone,  its  superior  convolution  being  marked  off  from  the  rest  by  the  line 
given  above  for  the  parallel  fissure  ;  but  the  anterior  extremity  of  this  lobe  projects 
under  the  great  wing  of  the  sphenoid,  while  posteriorly  the  inferior  temporal  convolu- 
tion is  prolonged  beneath  the  occipital  bone  to  the  occipital  pole  of  the  hemisphere. 

Determination  of  the  principal  fissures  on  the  surface  of  the  head. — If  a  median 
line  be  drawn  over  the  head  from  the  nasion  (centre  of  the  naso-frontal  suture)  to 
the  inion  (external  occipital  protuberance),  a  point  1  cm.  (or  half  an  inch)  behind 
the  centre  of  this  line  will  indicate  with  sufficient  accuracy  the  spot  where  the 
fissure  of  Koiando  meets  the  upper  border  of  the  hemisphere,  and  may  be  termed 
the  superior  Rolandic  point.  From  8  to  10  cm.  farther  back  the  lambda  may  be 
felt,  or  if  that  is  not  possible,  a  point  should  be  taken  on  the  nasio-inial  line  6'5  cm. 
(or  2|  inches)  above  the  inion,  and  a  line  carried  transversely  outwards  for  a 
distance  of  2  cm.  from  this  spot  will  mark  the  parieto-occipital  fissure. 

On  the  side  of  the  head,  a  line  from  the  lowest  point  of  the  infraorbital  margin 
to  the  centre  of  the  aperture  of  the  ear  (Eeid's  base-line)  is  taken  as  the  horizontal. 
This  line  is  about  parallel  with  the  upper  border  of  the  zygomatic  arch  ;  and 
vertical  lines  are  perpendicular  to  it.  A  spot  on  the  base-line  in  the  hollow  between 
the  tragus  of  the  ear  and  the  condyle  of  the  lower  jaw  is  known  as  the  preauricular 
point.  From  the  fronto-malar  junction  (p.  1)  let  a  line  be  carried  horizontally 


8 


SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF   THE    HEAD   AND    NECK. 


backwards  for  35  mm.,  and  from  the  end  of  this  a  vertical  line  for  12  mm.  upwards  ; 
the  upper  end  of  the  latter  line  marks  the  spot  where  the  anterior  branches  are 
given  off  from  the  Sylvian  fissure,  and  may  be  termed  the  Sylvian  point.  A  line 
drawn  from  the  fronto-malar  junction  through  the  Sylvian  point  to  the  lower  part 
of  the  parietal  eminence  will  about  lie  over  the  posterior  limb  of  the  Sylvian  fissure, 
and  may  be  called  the  Sylvian  line.  The  anterior  ascending  and  horizontal  branches 
of  the  fissure  may  be  marked  by  lines  2  cm.  long  starting  from  the  Sylvian  point, 

SUP  ROLAND.C  POWT 


UMBDA 


INIO'N 


Fig.  5. — SIDE  VIEW  OF  SKULL   ON    WHICH    THE  CHIEF  POINTS  AND  LINES  USED  IN  CKANIO-CEREBRAL 
TOPOGRAPHY  HAVE  BEEN  MARKED.     3.     (From  a  photograph  by  G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     (G.  D.  T. ) 

The  contour  of  the  cerebral  hemisphere,  with  the  Rolandic  and  Sylvian  fissures,  are  marked  by 
continuous  red  lines,  and  the  outline  of  the  insula  and  of  the  lateral  ventricle  by  broken  red  lines. 

the  one  directed  upwards  and  forwards  at  right  angles  with  the  Sylvian  line,  and  the 
other  horizontally  forwards. 

On  the  Sylvian  line,  25  mm.  behind  the  Sylvian  point,  is  the  lower  Rolandic 
point,  the  spot  where  the  fissure  of  Rolando,  if  prolonged,  would  meet  the  Sylvian 
line.  The  lower  Rolandic  point  is  about  5'5  cm.  (varying  from  4  to  7)  above  the 
upper  border  of  the  zygomatic  arch,  on  or  slightly  in  front  of  a  vertical  line  passing 
through  the  preauricular  point.  The  Rolandic  line  may  now  be  drawn  between  the 


CRANIO-CEREBRAL   TOPOGRAPHY.  9 

upper  and  lower  Rolandic  points,  and  gives  the  general  direction  of  the  fissure  of 
Rolando.  The  line  forms  an  angle  (the  Rolandic  angle)  anteriorly  with  the  median 
line  of  about  70°  (varying  in  individual  cases  from  64°  to  75°)  ;  and  if  prolonged 
downwards  it  crosses  the  zygomatic  arch  about  the  middle  (Le  Fort).  The  fissure  of 
Rolando  is  not  quite  so  long  as  the  Rolandic  line,  since  the  margin  of  the  hemi- 
sphere does  not  quite  reach  the  median  line  above,  while  below,  the  fissure  of  Rolando 
usually  ends  about  1  cm.  above  the  Sylvian  fissure  or  lower  Rolandic  point.  The 
Rolandic  line  coincides  most  nearly  with  the  upper  part  of  the  fissure,  the  inferior 
genu  of  which  projects  somewhat  in  front  of  the  line  a  little  below  its  centre, 
a  spot  which  is  placed  from  5  to  15  mm.  above  the  lower  temporal  line  on  the 
parietal  bone. 

The  precentral  sulci  are  situated  about  15  mm.  in  front  of  the  fissure  of  Rolando, 
with  which  they  are  nearly  parallel ;  from  the  lower  of  these  the  inferior  frontal 
sulcus  arches  forwards  and  downwards  beneath  the  temporal  crest  of  the  frontal 
bone,  which  can  be  felt  through  the  skin  ;  and  the  position  of  the  superior  frontal 
sulcus  may  be  indicated  approximately  by  a  line  running  forwards  from  the  superior 
precentral  sulcus  slightly  internal  to  the  centre  of  the  interval  between  the  temporal 
crest  and  the  median  line  of  the  forehead. 

The  postcentral  sulci  being  also  nearly  parallel  to,  and  about  15  mm.  distant 
from,  the  fissure  of  Rolando,  the  average  position  of  the  longitudinal  portion  of  the 
intraparietal  sulcus  may  be  marked  by  a  line  drawn  from  the  centre  of  the  Rolandic 
line  to  a  spot  35  mm.  external  to  the  lambda,  or  15  mm.  from  the  end  of  the  parieto- 
occipital  line. 

Lastly,  the  seat  of  the  parallel  fissure  may  be  determined  by  the  above- 
mentioned  line  from  the  marginal  tubercle  of  the  malar  bone  to  the  lambda. 

Island  of  Reil,  basal  ganglia,  and  lateral  ventricles. — The  Sylvian  point  marks 
the  position  of  the  pole  of  the  insula,  and  a  spot  on  the  Sylvian  line  35  mm.  behind 
this  point  will  correspond  to  its  posterior  angle.  The  upper  limit  of  the  insula  may 
then  be  indicated  by  a  line,  slightly  convex  upwards,  drawn  from  its  posterior  angle 
to  the  upper  end  of  the  anterior  ascending  branch  of  the  Sylvian  fissure,  and 
continued  forwards  for  a  distance  of  15  mm.  beyond  the  vertical  passing  through 
the  Sylvian  point  ;  the  lower  limit  by  a  line  directed  from  the  posterior  angle  down- 
wards and  forwards  to  a  spot  on  the  parallel  line  immediately  below  the  Sylvian 
point  ;  and  the  anterior  limit  by  a  line  joining  the  anterior  extremities  of  the  two 
foregoing  lines.  The  area  of  the  insula  thus  marked  out  will  serve  as  a  guide  to 
the  position  of  the  basal  ganglia,  which  extend  slightly  beyond  the  limits  of  the 
island,  and  are  circumscribed  by  a  strongly-curved  line  corresponding  to  the  outer 
border  of  the  main  part  of  the  lateral  ventricle.  This  line  may  be  traced,  beginning 
at  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  ventricle  1  cm.  in  front  of  the  foremost  point  of  the 
insula,  and  passing  backwards  in  an  arch,  which  follows  the  margin  of  the  anterior 
horn  and  body  of  the  cavity,  an  equal  distance  above  the  upper  limit  of  the  island 
to  a  spot  2  cm.  behind  its  posterior  extremity.  Thence,  the  inferior  horn  runs 
forwards  and  downwards,  to  end  about  1  cm.  below  the  level  of  the  parallel  fissure 
and  somewhat  in  advance  of  the  coronal  plane  passing  through  the  lower  Rolandic 
and  preauricular  points.  From  the  back  of  the  loop  thus  indicated  the  posterior 
horn  extends  a  variable  distance  towards  the  hindmost  point  of  the  hemisphere, 
which  is  placed  a  little  higher  than  the  occipital  pole,  beneath  the  occipital  point  of 
the  skull.1 

1  For  more  detailed  information  as  to  cranio-cerebral  topography,  reference  may  be  made  to  the 
memoir  by  D.  J.  Cunningham,  Contribution  to  the  Surface  Anatomy  of  the  Cerebral  Hemispheres,  with 
a  Chapter  on  Cranio-Cerebral  Topography,  by  Victor  Horsley.  The  subject  is  also  fully  illustrated  by 
the  series  of  models  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  former  anatomist,  showing  the  relations  of  the 
cerebral  hemispheres  in  situ  in  a  number  of  individuals  of  both  sexes  and  at  various  periods  of  life,  from 
infancy  to  old  age. 


10 


SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE   HEAD    AND   NECK. 


The  cerebellum,  occupying  the  inferior  occipital  fossa?,  is  in  contact  with  the 
cranial  wall  up  to  the  lower  margin  of  the  transverse  part  of  the  lateral  sinus.  This 
vessel  may  occasionally  have  a  lower  position  than  that  given  on  p.  4,  and  it  is 
advisable,  therefore,  in  operations  upon  the  cerebellum,  that  the  opening  in  the  bone 
should  be  kept  at  least  1  cm.  (half  an  inch)  below  the  level  of  a  line  drawn  from  the 
external  occipital  protuberance  to  the  centre  of  the  external  auditory  meatus,  while 
at  the  same  time  it  should  not  extend  farther  forwards  than  a  vertical  line  35  mm. 
(one  inch  and  a  half)  behind  the  latter  spot.  In  this  way  both  the  lateral  sinus  and 
the  occipital  artery  will  be  avoided  (fig.  9). 

Mastoid  antrum. — The  air-cells,  which  in  the  adult  usually  occupy  the  interior 
of  the  mastoid  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  open  into  a  small  chamber  termed  the 
mastoid  antrum.  This  is  continuous  anteriorly  with  the  highest  part  of  the 


^g  sem&tsEular  canal 


cctnal  offadaL  nenie     j 


canal  of  ten&or  tytnfianL\     j        / 


tube.   :    „..„„ 

GliuxSiaa,  Assure.  \VJ& 

tympa., 

A 


\        La&raL  sulcus 


Glasenan,  fissuss 

e.xt.  uwd,.  meatus 
B 


Fig.  6. — LKET  TEMPORAL  BONE,  DIVIDED  BY  A  VERTICAL  SECTION  PASSING  THROUGH  THE  TYMPANUM 
AND  MASTOID  ANTRUM  :  A,  INNER  PORTION  ;  B,  OUTER  PORTION.  Natural  size.  (From  a  photo- 
graph by  G.  W.  B.  Waters.)  (G.  D.  T.) 

The  section  is  directed  somewhat  obliquely  from  before,  backwards  and  outwards.  The  tympanic 
cavity  and  the  antrum  are  coloured  blue,  and  the  division  between  the  epityrapanic  recess  and  the 
antrum  is  indicated  by  a  dotted  line  ;  c.  c.  carotid  canal. 

tympanic  cavity  or  epitympanic  recess  (attic  of  the  tympanum),  and  thus,  through 
the  Eustachian  tube,  the  mastoid  cells  are  put  into  communication  with  the  external 
air.  In  form  the  mastoid  antrum  may  be  compared  to  the  bulb  of  a  retort, 
which  is  somewhat  compressed  in  the  transverse  direction,  and  the  truncated  neck 
of  which  corresponds  to  the  opening  into  the  epifcympanic  recess  (aditus  ad 
antrum). 

The  dimensions  of  the  antrum  are  subject  to  considerable  variation,  but  in  most 
cases  it  measures  between  10  and  15  mm.  longitudinally,  about  10  mm.  vertically, 
and  from  4  to  6  mm.  transversely.  Its  depth  from  the  surface,  i.e.,  the  thickness 
of  its  outer  wall,  varies  from  7  to  14  mm.  The  bone  here  is  commonly  very  hard 
and  dense,  but  in  the  deeper  part  it  is  often  more  spongy,  being  excavated  by  cells 
in  communication  with  the  cavity.  The  entrance  to  the  antrum  from  the  epi- 
tympanic recess  is  rather  triangular  in  form,  with  the  base  upwards  and  the  lower 
angle  broadly  rounded  off :  its  longest  diameter  is  about  4  mm.  both  vertically  and 
transversely.  The  lower  margin  of  the  opening  is  on  a  level  with  the  upper  wall  of 


THE   MASTOID   ANTRUM. 


11 


the  external  auditory  meatus  ;  and  the  coronal  plane  in  which  the  opening  is 
contained,  in  consequence  of  the  forward  inclination  of  the  bony  meatus,  is  placed  a 
little  (about  one-fourth  of  the  horizontal  diameter  of  the  meatal  opening)  in  front 
of  the  posterior  margin  of  the  external  orifice  of  that  canal.  The  epitympanic 
recess  is  situated  above  the  anterior  three-fourths  of  the  orifice.  Behind  the 
entrance  the  floor  of  the  antrum  sinks,  forming  a  hollow  which  does  not  usually 
extend  below  the  level  of  the  centre  of  the  auditory  meatus.  The  cavity  is,  however, 
continued  into  the  mastoid  cells,  which  are  often  of  large  size,  and  then  as  a  rule 
reach  to  the  tip  of  the  mastoid  process. 

Superiorly,  the  antrum  is  separated  from  the  middle  fossa  of  the  base  of  the  skull 
by  a  thin   plate    of  bone   which  continues  backwards  and  upwards  the  tegmen 


masCcid.  cetie 


Fig.  7. — RIGHT  TEMPORAL  BONK,  FROM  WHICH  THE  SUPERFICIAL  PORTION  OF  THF.  MASTOID  DIVISION 
HAS  BEEN  REMOVED,  EXPOSING  THE  MASTOID  ANTRUM.  Natural  size.  (From  a  photograph  by 
G.  W.  B.  Waters.)  (G.  D.  T.) 

The  broken  line  indicates  the  position  of  the  lateral  sinus. 

tympani.  This  sometimes  presents  small  deficiencies,  in  which  there  is  only  a 
slender  fibrous  layer  between  the  mucous  lining  of  the  cavity  and  the  dura  mater  ; 
and  these  two  membranes  are  always  united  by  connective  tissue  and  vessels  passing 
through  the  petro-squamosal  fissure,  as  well  as  through  minute  apertures  in  the 
tegmen.  In  position,  the  roof  of  the  antrum  corresponds  as  a  rule  to  the  supra- 
mastoid  crest  externally,  but  not  unfrequently  it  rises  somewhat  above  that  level, 
and  in  that  case  the  upper  part  of  the  antrum  may  be  overlapped  by  the  lateral 
margin  of  the  cerebral  hemisphere,  the  inferior  temporal  convolution  of  which  is 
received  at  this  spot  into  a  slight  groove  between  the  prominent  tegmen  internally 
and  the  lower  border  of  the  squamous  temporal  externally. 

From  the  communication  with  the  epitympanic  recess  the  antrum  extends  back- 
wards and  outwards,  so  that  it  comes  nearer  to  the  surface  behind  than  in  front. 
Anteriorly,  there  is  only  a  thin  bony  wall  between  the  cavity  and  the  deep  part  of 


12 


SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 


the  auditory  meatus.  Posteriorly,  it  approaches  the  descending  part  of  the  lateral 
sinus,  in  some  cases  reaching  close  to  the  osseous  lamina  which  forms  the  floor  of 
the  groove,  but  more  commonly  the  two  are  separated  by  an  interval  of  from  5  to 
10  mm.  occupied  by  mastoid  cells.  The  sinus  is  usually  nearer  to  the  surface  than 
the  air-space.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the  outer  wall  of  the  antrum  is  developed 
from  the  postauditory  process  of  the  squamo-zygomatic  division  of  the  temporal 
bone  (see  Osteology,  p.  74)  ;  and  there  are  generally  in  the  adult  some  vestiges  of 
the  infantile  masto-squamosal  suture  in  the  form  of  small  clefts  and  canals  which 
lead  from  the  cavity  to  the  exterior  of  the  bone,  and  are  occupied  by  connective 
tissue  and  veins. 


remains  of  y' 
masto  -  scjuamosdl 
Stature 


facial,  ri'erue 


Fig.     8.  — LOWKR     AND     POSTERIOR     PORTION    OP     RIGHT     TEMPORAL     BONE,    SHOWING     THE     SUPRAMEATAL 
TRIANGLE,    COURSE    OP    THE    FACIAL    NERVE,    &C.       Natural  size.       (GJ.  D.  T.) 

The  mastoid  antrum  may  be  reached  from  the  exterior  by  perforating  the  bone 
close  to  the  upper  and  posterior  part  of  the  external  auditory  meatus.  In  this 
region  Macewen  describes  a  suprameatal  triangle,1  which  is  bounded  above  by  the 
supramastoid  crest,  below  and  in  front  by  the  postero-superior  quadrant  of  the  outer 
margin  of  the  osseous  meatus,  and  behind  by  a  vertical  line  tangential  to  the  hind- 
most point  of  that  opening.  The  surface  of  bone  included  in  the  triangle  is  usually 
marked  by  a  small  depression — the  suprameatal  fossa,  which  is  separated  from  the 
aperture  of  the  meatus  by  a  sharp  prominent  edge — the  suprameatal  spine.  The 
perforation  should  be  made  within  this  area,  at  the  site  of,  or  close  behind,  the 
suprameatal  fossa,  and  be  directed  inwards  and  slightly  fowards,  following  the 
inclination  of  the  external  auditory  meatus.  The  antrum  will  then  be  opened  at  its 
fore  part,  at  a  depth  from  the  surface  varying  generally  from  1  to  14  mm.  ;  in 
extreme  cases,  and  especially  as  the  result  of  disease,  this  distance  may  be  reduced 
to  3  mm.,  or  increased  to  18  mm.,  or  even  more.  At  the  lower  part  of  the  entrance 
into  the  antrum  the  inner  wall  of  the  cavity  presents  a  slight  bulging  over  the 
external  semicircular  canal  (fig.  6),  which  may  be  injured  if  the  instrument  is  not 
checked  as  soon  as  the  cavity  is  reached :  the  distance  of  the  wall  of  the  canal  from 
the  surface  is  mostly  between  17  and  20  mm.  (about  three-quarters  of  an  inch). 
Just  below  and  in  front  of  this,  on  the  inner  side  of  the  epitympanic  recess,  is  the 
arch  of  the  facial  nerve  contained  in  its  canal,  the  osseous  wall  of  which  is  thin 

1  W.  Macewen,  Pyogenic  Infective  Diseases  of  the  Brain  and  Spinal  Cord,  1893,  p.    . 


THE    FACE. 


13 


towards  the  cavity,  and  often  defective  in  part.  The  nerve  will  best  be  avoided  by 
not  directing  the  perforation  too  much  forwards.  Between  the  semicircular  canal 
in  front  and  the  lateral  sinus  behind,  the  air-spaces  are  in  relation  internally  with  the 
posterior  fossa  of  the  base  of  the  skull,  the  thickness  of  the  intervening  bone  ranging 
from  1  to  9  mm.  The  original  perforation  must  be  kept  below  the  supramastoid  crest 
in  order  to  avoid  opening  the  middle  fossa  of  the  skull ;  and  it  should  not  extend 


mastoid  foramen. 


aperture  into 
mastoid  antrum. 


Fig.  9. — LOWER   AND   HINDER   PART   OF    SKULL,    IN   WHICH   AN   OPENING    HAS  BHEN    MADE  INTO  THE 

MASTOID    ANTRUM,    AND    ON    WHICH     THE    COURSE     OF     THE    OCCIPITAL    ARTERY     AND     LATERAL     SINUS 

ARE  INDICATED.     ( From  a  photograph  by  G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     f     (G.  D.  T.) 

backwards  more  than  2  mm.  beyond  the  posterior  boundary  of  the  suprameatal 
triangle,  or  the  lateral  sinus  may  be  endangered. 

In  the  infant  and  child  the  mastoid  antrum  has  nearly  its  full  size,  but  its  outer 
wall  is  relatively  thin.  The  mastoid  cells  are,  however,  not  usually  developed  before 
twelve  years  of  age. 

The  face. — In  the  face  proper,  the  nasal  bones  and  the  margin  of  the  anterior 
nasal  aperture  are  readily  traced,  and  at  the  lower  part  of  the  latter,  in  the  root  of 
the  septum  narium,  the  anterior  nasal  spine  is  felt.  In  front  of  this  opening  the  form 
of  the  upper  and  lower  lateral  cartilages  can  be  distinguished,  and  the  inner  portion 
of  the  latter  is  more  clearly  made  out  by  passing  the  finger  into  the  nostril,  by  which 
means  part  of  the  cartilage  of  the  septum,  the  lower  margin  of  the  upper  lateral 
cartilage,  and  sometimes  the  tip  of  the  inferior  turbinate  bone,  can  also  be  felt. 

With  the  nasal  speculum,  if  the  parts  be  normal,  the  dull  red  mucous  membrane 
of  the  floor  of  the  nose  and  of  the  lower  part  of  the  septum  may  be  seen,  the  brighter 
red  inferior  turbinate  body  for  the  greater  part  of  or  all  its  extent,  and  the  inferior 
meatus  for  a  variable  distance.  The  anterior  border  and  a  small  part  of  the  inferior 
border,  i.e.,  the  operculum,  of  the  middle  turbinate  body  may  also  be  seen,  and  a 
very  small  part  of  the  middle  meatus.  The  fore  part  of  the  roof  is  visible,  but  the 
superior  turbinate  body  rarely,  and  the  superior  meatus  never.  The  back  of  the 
pharynx  can  be  seen  in  a  nose  of  moderate  dimensions. 

Below  the  base  of  the  zygoma,  the  temporo-maxillary  articulation  is  quite  super- 


J4  SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    HEAD    AND   NECK. 

ficial  behind  the  upper  part  of  the  masseter,  and  from  the  condyle  the  posterior 
margin  of  the  raraus  of  the  lower  jaw  can  be  followed  to  the  angle.  The  lower 
margin  of  the  jaw  can  also  be  felt  throughout,  and  ascending  from  its  central  point 
the  anterior  edge  of  the  masseter.  Immediately  in  front  of  the  latter,  the  facial 
artery  crosses  the  base  of  the  jaw,  and  is  readily  found  by  its  pulsation  ;  the  course 
of  the  vessel  is  roughly  marked  by  a  line  passing  upwards  a  little  outside  the  corner 
of  the  mouth  and  continued  by  the  side  of  the  nose  to  the  inner  canthus  of  the  eye. 
The  coronary  branch  of  the  artery  may  be  felt  pulsating  beneath  the  mucous 
membrane  in  each  lip  very  near  its  free  border.  Stensen's  duct  runs  generally  in 
the  direction  of  a  line  drawn  from  the  lower  margin  of  the  concha  of  the  ear  to  a 
point  midway  between  the  ala  of  the  nose  and  the  free  margin  of  the  lip,  but  it 
varies  somewhat  in  position  in  different  subjects  ;  accompanying  the  duct  are  the 
transverse  facial  vessels  (usually  above)  and  the  infraorbital  branches  of  the  facial 
nerve  (below).  The  interval  between  the  ramus  of  the  jaw  and  the  mastoid  process 
is  occupied  by  the  parotid  gland,  a  part  of  which  extends  forwards  over  the  masseter 
muscle,  and  the  trunk  of  the  facial  nerve  is  deeply  placed  beneath  the  gland  ;  the 
position  of  the  nerve  may  be  indicated  by  a  line  running  downwards  and  forwards 
from  the  anterior  border  of  the  mastoid  process  at  the  point  where  it  meets  the  ear. 
A  line  carried  downwards  over  the  face,  crossing  the  supraorbital  notch  and  the 
interval  between  the  two  bicuspid  teeth  of  the  lower  jaw,  will  be  found  to  be  nearly 
vertical  and  to  pass  over  the  infraorbital  and  mental  foramina,  thus  forming  a  guide 
to  the  spots  at  which  the  largest  cutaneous  branches  of  the  three  trunks  of  the  fifth 
nerve  come  to  the  surface.  The  infraorbital  foramen  is  about  1  cm.  below  the 
margin  of  the  orbit ;  and  the  mental  foramen  is  midway  between  the  upper  and  lower 
margins  of  the  jaw. 

About  the  anterior  half  of  the  eyeball  can  be  felt  in  the  aperture  of  the  orbit :  it 
gives  a  tense  elastic  sensation  to  the  fingers.  At  the  upper  and  inner  angle  of  the 
orbital  opening  the  pulley  of  the  superior  oblique  muscle  may  also  be  felt. 

When  the  eye  is  open  the  skin  is  drawn  into  the  deep  superior  palpebral  sulcus 
immediately  above  the  upper  lid,  and  forms  a  loose  projecting  fold  between  this 
furrow  and  the  eyebrow.  The  corresponding  inferior  palpebral  sulcus  of  the  lower 
lid  is  much  slighter,  and  often  broken  up  :  it  is  most  distinct  when  the  eye  is 
directed  downwards.  Below  this,  another  shallow  groove,  the  palpebro-malar  sulcus, 
runs  round  from  near  the  inner  canthus  of  the  eye,  following  fairly  closely  the  lower 
margin  of  the  orbit.  A  small  external  palpebral  sulcus  is  continued  outwards  from 
the  outer  canthus  for  about  3  mm.,  and  forms  a  prolongation  of  the  palpebral  cleft 
when  the  eye  is  closed.  Contraction  of  the  outer  part  of  the  orbicularis  palpebrarum 
gives  rise  to  radiating  furrows  outside  and  below  the  eye,  markings  which  are 
generally  permanent  in  old  persons. 

The  skin  of  the  eyelid  is  very  soft  and  thin  ;  at  the  free  margin  of  each  lid  it 
passes  into  the  conjunctiva  along  the  line  of  the  eyelashes,  and  within  this  a  sharp 
edge  is  formed,  especially  in  the  case  of  the  lower  lid,  which  is  closely  applied  to  the 
surface  of  the  eyeball.  The  palpebral  fissure  is  somewhat  oval,  or  widely  fusiform, 
in  shape,  but  the  margin  of  the  upper  lid  is  more  arched  than  that  of  the  lower. 
The  fissure  is  also  generally  a  little  inclined  from  without  inwards  and  downwards. 

The  whole  length  of  the  palpebral  fissure  is  about  30  mm.  (an  inch  and  a 
quarter)  ;  its  breadth  is  scarcely  sufficient,  unless  when  the  eyes  are  unusually  widely 
opened,  to  expose  the  whole  of  the  cornea ;  but  these  dimensions,  especially  the 
latter,  vary  considerably  in  different  persons,  thus  causing  the  eye  to  appear  larger 
or  smaller,  although  the  size  of  the  globe  itself  is  relatively  very  constant.  At  the 
outer  canthus,  the  lids  meet  in  an  acute  angle  ;  at  the  inner,  the  fissure  is  prolonged 
downwards  and  inwards  for  about  5  mm.  between  portions  of  the  lid-margins,  which 
are  straight  and  rounded.  The  junction  of  the  curved  and  straight  portions  of  the 


THE   FACE.  15 

margin  is  marked  by  a  slight  elevation,  the  papilla  lacrimalis,  which  is  much  better 
developed  in  the  lower  lid  than  the  upper,  and  on  drawing  the  lid  forwards  a  minute 
opening,  the  punctum  lacrimale,  is  seen  on  the  summit  of  the  papilla,  leading  into 
the  canaliculus  by  which  the  tears  are  conveyed  into  the  lachrymal  sac.  In  the 
neighbourhood  of  the  inner  canthus  the  lids  are  separated  from  the  eyeball  by  the 
caruncula  lacrimalis,  a  red  fleshy-looking  portion  of  skin,  which  supports  a  few  fine 
hairs,  and  by  the  fold  of  mucous  membrane  known  as  the  plica  semilunaris. 

The  lids  can  be  readily  everted,  the  lower  one  by  simply  pulling  it  downwards, 
the  upper  one  by  turning  it  over  a  probe,  and  the  ocular  and  palpebral  conjunctiva 
can  thus  be  completely  examined  ;  the  former  is  transparent  and  smooth,  presenting 
only  a  few  minute  vessels  in  the  healthy  state  ;  the  latter  is  more  or  less  red  and 
velvety  in  appearance.  The  Meibomian  glands  are  seen  at  the  same  time,  appearing 
through  the  conjunctiva  as  lines  of  yellowish  granules  arranged  perpendicularly  to 
the  edges  of  the  lids  ;  and  along  the  latter  the  openings  of  their  ducts  are  visible  in 
the  form  of  minute  spots  within  the  line  of  the  eyelashes. 

If  the  eyelids  are  drawn  forcibly  outwards,  the  internal  tarsal  ligament,  or  tendo 
palpebrarum,  is  made  to  project  between  the  inner  canthus  and  the  margin  of  the 
orbit  ;  and  this  band  can  also  be  felt  as  it  is  tightened  during  the  act  of  winking. 
Behind  the  tarsal  ligament,  and  reaching  to  a  somewhat  higher  level,  is  the  lachrymal 
sac  ;  into  the  latter  the  canaliculi  open,  taking  a  course  from  the  puncta  lacrimalia, 
at  first  vertically,  and  then  nearly  horizontally,  the  one  above  and  the  other  below 
the  ligament.  A  knife  entered  immediately  below  the  internal  tarsal  ligament  will 
open  the  lower  part  of  the  lachrymal  sac,  and  a  probe  may  then  be  passed  through 
the  incision,  in  a  direction  downwards  and  slightly  backwards  and  outwards,  along 
the  nasal  duct  into  the  nose. 

Mouth  and  fauces. — On  looking  into  the  mouth,  the  teeth  are  seen,  and  by 
everting  the  lips,  the  outer  surface  of  the  gums  may  be  inspected,  and  the  alveolar 
processes  can  be  examined  with  the  finger.  The  smooth  mucous  membrane  lining 
the  lips  is  thus  exposed,  and  in  the  middle  line,  passing  from  each  lip  to  the  jaw,  is 
a  thin  fold  termed  the  fraenum  ;  of  these  the  upper  one  is  the  larger.  On  pulling 
the  angle  of  the  mouth  outwards,  the  lining  membrane  of  the  inside  of  the  cheek 
can  be  examined,  and  the  papilla  on  which  the  duct  of  Stensen  opens  may  be  seen 
and  felt  opposite  the  second  molar  tooth  of  the  upper  jaw ;  with  some  difficulty  a 
fine  probe  may  be  made  to  enter  the  aperture.  A  little  farther  back,  if  the  mouth 
be  alternately  opened  and  shut,  it  is  easy  to  distinguish  the  anterior  borders  of  the 
masseter  and  temporal  muscles,  as  well  as  the  edge  and  inner  surface  of  the  ramus  of 
the  jaw. 

By  raising  the  tongue,  the  inner  aspect  of  the  gums  and  the  floor  of  the  mouth 
are  brought  into  view.  The  under  surface  of  the  tongue  is  smooth,  and  is  connected 
in  the  middle  line  with  the  floor  of  the  mouth  by  the  frcenum  linguae,,  a  fold  of 
mucous  membrane  similar  to,  but  much  larger  than,  the  frsena  of  the  lips  ;  from 
this  a  fine  line  is  continued  forwards  to  the  tip  of  the  tongue.  Somewhat  less  than 
half  an  inch  external  to  the  frsenurn,  on  each  side,  the  ranine  vein  is  clearly  seen 
through  the  delicate  mucous  membrane  ;  the  corresponding  artery  is  more  deeply 
placed  and  does  not  come  into  view  ;  an  elevated  and  fringed  line  of  the  mucous 
membrane,  plica  fimbriata,  lies  superficially  to  these  vessels,  and  may  be  followed, 
converging  towards  its  fellow,  almost  as  far  as  the  tip  of  the  tongue.  Between  the 
alveolar  border  and  the  tongue,  on  each  side,  is  the  alveola-lingual  sulcus,  at  the 
bottom  of  which  the  mucous  membrane  is  raised  into  a  well-marked  ridge,  directed 
obliquely  forwards  and  inwards,  over  the  sublingual  salivary  gland.  Each  ridge 
ends  close  to  the  middle  line  in  a  small  papilla,  and  on  this  is  seen,  in  the  form  of  a 
minute  spot,  the  opening  of  Wharton's  duct,  into  which  a  fine  probe  may  be  easily 


16  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY   OF    THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 

On  putting  back  the  head,  the  mucous  membrane  covering  the  hard  palate,  and 
the  soft  palate  come  into  view,  as  well  as  the  uvula,  the  anterior  and  posterior  pillars 
of  the  fauces,  and  the  tonsils.  The  hamular  process  is  plainly  felt  a  little  behind 
and  internal  to  the  last  molar  tooth  ;  and  just  in  front  of  this  is  situated  the  opening 
of  the  posterior  palatine  canal,  through  which  the  largest  vessels  and  nerves  of  the 
palate  issue.  The  pterygo- maxillary  ligament  is  to  be  felt  descending  from  the 
hamular  process  to  the  inferior  maxilla,  being  contained  in  a  more  or  less  prominent 
fold  of  the  mucous  membrane,  which  passes  between  the  jaws  behind  the  extremities 
of  the  dental  arches.  Just  in  front  of  this,  and  immediately  internal  to  the  last 
molar  tooth,  the  lingual  branch  of  the  fifth  nerve  runs  inwards  beneath  the  mucous 
membrane  to  the  side  of  the  tongue. 

Between  the  posterior  pillars  of  the  fauces,  a  portion  of  the  mucous  lining  of  the 
hinder  wall  of  the  pharynx  is  seen  ;  and  if  the  finger  be  passed  behind  the  tongue, 
there  is  no  difficulty  in  feeling  the  greater  part  of  the  back  of  the  pharynx  and  the 
epiglottis.  By  hooking  the  finger  up  behind  the  soft  palate,  the  basilar  process  of 
the  occipital  bone  is  reached,  and  the  posterior  nares  and  adjacent  parts  may  be 
explored.  It  is  easy  thus  to  distinguish  the  vault  of  the  pharynx,  the  septum  nasi, 
the  posterior  extremities  of  the  middle  and  inferior  turbinate  bones,  and  the  openings 
of  the  Eustachian  tubes  ;  and  the  finger  may  be  made  to  pass  some  distance  into 
the  nasal  fossae.  In  this  way  also  the  upper  four  or  five  (in  children  six)  cervical 
vertebrae  may  be  examined,  the  anterior  arch  of  the  atlas  being  opposite  the  lower 
margin  of  the  posterior  nares,  and  the  body  of  the  axis  corresponding  to  the  soft 
palate.  The  part  of  the  column  which  is  accessible  to  a  straight  instrument 
introduced  through  the  mouth  is  very  limited,  extending  in  the  adult  from  the 
lower  border  of  the  axis  to  the  middle  or  lower  part  of  the  fourth  cervical  vertebra  ; 
in  the  child,  owing  to  the  small  depth  of  the  face,  it  comprises  the  body  of  the  axis 
and  of  the  third  cervical  vertebra  (Chipault). 

By  posterior  rhinoscopy  the  upper  parts  of  the  posterior  nares  are  seen,  separated 
by  the  septum.  They  are  in  great  part  occupied  by  the  posterior  ends  of  the 
turbinate  bodies,  of  which  the  most  conspicuous  is  the  middle  ;  the  superior  is 
usually  seen,  but  only  the  upper  part  of  the  inferior,  the  lower  part  of  the  latter,  as 
well  as  the  lower  part  of  the  septum,  being  concealed  by  the  soft  palate.  On  each 
side  of  the  posterior  nares  are  seen  the  Eustachian  tube,  the  salpingo-pharyngeal 
and  salpingo-palatine  folds,  and  the  lateral  recess  of  the  pharynx  (fossa  of  Kosen- 
muller).  By  turning  the  mirror  upwards,  the  vault  of  the  pharynx,  the  pharyngeal 
tonsil  and  the  median  pharyngeal  recess  (bursa  pharyngea)  may  also  be  examined. 
The  septum  appears  whitish,  the  turbinate  bodies  are  of  an  ash-grey  colour,  and  the 
rest  of  the  mucous  membrane  is  of  various  shades  of  red. 

THE    NECK. 

The  front  of  the  neck  is  divided  into  an  upper,  suprahyoid,  submaxillary,  or  hyo- 
mental  region,  and  a  lower,  infrahyoid  or  hyo-sternal  region.  The  hyoid  bone,  which 
forms  the  boundary  line  between  the  two  divisions,  can  be  felt  in  the  receding  angle 
below  the  chin,  and  it  may  be  examined  by  fixing  the  two  great  cornua  between  the 
fingers.  The  anterior  bellies  of  the  digastric  muscles  form  the  convex  surface  in 
the  middle  of  the  suprahyoid  region,  and  outside  this  on  each  side  the  submaxillary 
gland  is  both  to  be  felt  and  seen.  The  median  prominence  (pomum  Adami}  in  the 
upper  part  of  the  infrahyoid  region  is  due  to  the  thyroid  cartilage,  and  is  strongly 
marked  in  men,  especially  those  with  deep  voices,  small  or  indistinct  in  women  and 
children.  Above  the  thyroid  cartilage  the  finger  sinks  into  the  depression  (thyro- 
hyoid  space)  between  that  and  the  hyoid  bone  ;  below  the  thyroid,  the  crico-thyroid 
space  and  the  cricoid  cartilage  are  recognised  ;  and  from  the  latter  the  finger  passes 
on  to  the  trachea.  The  rings  of  the  trachea  are,  however,  scarcely  to  be  distinguished, 


THE    NECK.  17 

being  obscured  above  by  the  isthmus  of  the  thyroid  body,  and  below  by  the  muscles 
and  the  increasing  quantity  of  fat  as  the  air-tube  recedes  from  the  surface,  the  depth 
of  the  front  of  the  trachea  at  the  upper  border  of  the  sternum  amounting  to  nearly 
an  inch  and  a  half  (3'5  cm.). 

The  lower  part  of  the  epiglottis  is  placed  behind  the  thyro-hyoid  space,  and 

still  farther  back  is  the  upper  aperture  of  the  larynx.    The  rima  glottidis  is  at  a 

.    lower  level,  being  opposite  the  middle  of  the  short  anterior  margin  of  the  thyroid 

cartilage.     The  lower  border  of  the  cricoid  cartilage  indicates  also  the  termination 

of  the  pharynx  and  the  commencement  of  the  oesophagus. 

Along  the  side  of  the  neck,  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle  runs  obliquely  from  the 
mastoid  part  of  the  temporal  bone  to  the  sternum  and  clavicle  ;  its  anterior  border, 
forming  the  hinder  boundary  of  the  anterior  triangle  of  the  neck,  is  thick  and 
prominent,  and  leads  down  to  the  strongly  marked  sternal  head,  which  passes  to  the 
front  of  the  manubrium  and  gives  rise,  with  its  fellow  of  the  opposite  side,  to  the 
deep  suprasternal  notch  (fossa  jugularis}.  The  posterior  border  of  the  muscle  is 
thin,  and  in  its  upper  part  does  not  show  on  the  surface ;  inferiorly  it  becomes 
evident  and  is  continued  into  the  clavicular  head,  which  is,  however,  broader  and 
less  salient  than  the  sternal  origin.  A  slight  depression  usually  corresponds  to  an 
interval  between  the  two  heads,  and  the  lower  boundary  of  the  depression  is  formed 
by  the  somewhat  prominent  inner  extremity  of  the  clavicle.  A  needle  thrust  back- 
wards in  this  depression,  and  in  contact  with  the  end  of  the  clavicle,  would  reach,  on 
the  right  side,  the  bifurcation  of  the  innominate  artery,  on  the  left,  the  common 
carotid  arteiy  as  it  passes  into  the  neck. 

The  carotid  arteries  are  situated  just  beneath  the  anterior  border  of  the 
sterno-mastoid  muscle,  their  position  being  indicated  more  exactly  by  a  line  drawn 
from  the  sterno-clavicular  articulation  to  a  point  midway  between  the  angle  of  the 
jaw  and  the  tip  of  the  mastoid  process.  The  common  carotid  artery  reaches  upwards 
-  as  far  as,  or  slightly  beyond,  the  upper  border  of  the  thyroid  cartilage  ;  above  this 
level,  the  external  and  internal  carotids  are  placed  side  by  side,  the  external  being 
the  more  anterior,  until  they  pass  beneath  the  posterior  belly  of  the  digastric 
muscle,  the  position  of  which  may  be  indicated  by  a  line  drawn  from  the  raastoid 
process  to  the  fore  part  of  the  hyoid  bone.  If  deep  pressure  be  made  in  the  situa- 
tion of  the  great  vessels  opposite  the  cricoid  cartilage,  the  prominent  anterior 
tubercle  of  the  transverse  process  of  the  sixth  cervical  vertebra  (carotid  tubercle)  can 
be  felt,  and  the  common  carotid  artery  may  be  compressed  against  it.  This  is  a 
little  below  the  spot  at  which  the  omo-hyoid  muscle  crosses  the  carotid  artery,  and 
indicates  also  the  place  where  the  inferior  thyroid  artery  turns  inwards,  and  the 
vertebral  artery  usually  enters  upon  its  course  through  the  foramina  in  the  transverse 
processes. 

The  lingual  artery  arises  from  the  external  carotid  opposite  the  hyoid  bone  ;  it 
first  forms  a  small  loop  with  the  convexity  upwards,  then  passes  forwards  along  the 
upper  margin  of  the  great  cornu  of  the  hyoid  just  below  the  level  of  the  hypo- 
glossal  nerve  and  ranine  vein,  which  are  separated  from  it  by  the  hyo-glossus 
muscle.  At  a  slightly  higher  level,  the  occipital  and  facial  arteries  leave  the 
external  carotid,  the  former  passing  up  to  the  transverse  process  of  the  atlas,  which 
may  be  felt  just  below  and  a  little  in  front  of  the  tip  of  the  mastoid  process,  the 
latter  taking  a  winding  course  at  first  beneath  and  then  above  the  submaxillary 
gland  to  the  anterior  border  of  the  masseter  muscle.  The  superior  thyroid  artery, 
arising  below  the  lingual,  runs  downwards  and  inwards  near  the  back  of  the  thyroid 
cartilage,  and  sends  its  crico-thyroid  branch  across  the  crico-thyroid  space. 

The  line  of  the  internal  jugular  vein  is  just  external  to  that  of  the  carotid 
arteries  ;  the  facial  vein,  more  superficial  than  the  artery,  courses  from  the  anterior 
border  of  the  masseter  downwards  and  backwards,  to  join  the  main  trunk  about 


18  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE   HEAT)   AND    KECK. 

opposite  the  thyro-hyoid  space  ;  the  middle  thyroid  vein  crosses  the  common 
carotid  artery  near  the  level  of  the  cricoid  cartilage,  and  the  large  inferior  thyroid 
veins  pass  downwards  deeply  on  the  front  of  the  trachea.  More  superficially  placed, 
and  often  showing  through  the  skin,  are  the  anterior  jugular  vein  near  the  middle 
line,  and  a  communicating  branch,  frequently  of  large  size,  between  the  facial  and 
anterior  jugular  veins,  lying  along  the  anterior  border  of  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle. 
The  right  and  left  anterior  jugular  veins  are  generally  connected  by  a  cross  branch 
.of  considerable  size  at  the  bottom  of  the  suprasternal  notch,  close  to  the  upper 
border  of  the  manubrium,  and  the  lower  part  of  each  vein  is  then  directed  outwards 
behind  the  origin  of  the  sterno-mastoid,  so  that  great  care  must  be  exercised,  in 
order  not  to  wound  the  vessel,  in  dividing  this  muscle  for  the  cure  of  wry-neck. 

The  position  of  the  tonsil  corresponds  externally  to  a  spot  slightly  above  the 
angle  of  the  jaw. 

Behind  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle,  between  it  and  the  trapezius,  is  the  inter- 
muscular  space  known  as  the  posterior  triangle  of  the  neck  ;  inferiorly,  this  gives 
rise  to  a  broad  depression,  the  supraclavicular  fossa,  in  which  the  omo-hyoid  muscle 
and  the  brachial  plexus  may  be  felt,  and  in  thin  persons  seen.  In  the  angle  between 
the  sterno-mastoid  and  the  clavicle,  the  third  part  of  the  subclavian  artery  can  be 
felt  pulsating,  and  the  circulation  in  the  vessel  may  be  arrested  here  by  pressure 
directed  downwards  and  backwards  against  the  first  rib.  The  subclavian  artery,  as 
it  crosses  the  root  of  the  neck,  describes  a  curve  with  the  convexity  upwards,  having 
its  inner  end  behind  the  sterno-clavicular  articulation,  its  outer  end  beneath  the 
centre  of  the  clavicle,  and  its  mid-point  from  half  an  inch  to  an  inch  (1 — 2'5  cm.) 
above  that  bone.  The  left  artery  is  more  deeply  placed  at  first  than  the  right,  and 
does  not  usually  rise  so  high  in  the  neck.  The  subclavian  vein  is  placed  at  a  lower 
level,  and  is,  as  a  rule,  entirely  under  cover  of  the  clavicle.  The  pleura  and  lung 
ascend  above  the  clavicle  into  the  arch  formed  by  the  subclavian  artery.  The  pulsa- 
tion of  the  transverse  cervical  artery  may  frequently  be  distinguished  a  short  distance 
above  the  clavicle. 

The  external  jugular  vein  runs  over  the  surface  of  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle  in 
the  direction  of  a  line  drawn  from  the  angle  of  the  jaw  to  the  centre  of  the  clavicle, 
and  is  covered  only  by  the  integument  and  the  platysma,  the  fibres  of  the  latter 
being  nearly  parallel  to  the  course  of  the  vein.  The  distance  to  which  it  reaches 
beyond  the  posterior  edge  of  the  sterno-mastoid  below  varies  considerably.  Near 
the  clavicle  the  vein  becomes  considerably  enlarged,  being  joined  by  some  branches 
from  the  shoulder  (transverse  cervical  and  suprascapular),  which,  with  the  lower 
part  of  the  trunk,  generally  form  a  more  or  less  dense  plexus  over  the  third  part  of 
the  subclavian  artery. 

About  an  inch  (2-5  cm.)  below  the  tip  of  the  mastoid  process,  the  spinal  accessory 
nerve  passes  beneath  the  anterior  border  of  the  sterno-mastoid ;  emerging  at, 
or  slightly  above,  the  middle  of  the  posterior  border  of  this  muscle,  it  then 
continues  its  oblique  course  across  the  posterior  triangular  space,  and  sinks  beneath 
the  upper  border  of  the  trapezius  on  a  level  with  the  sixth  or  seventh  cervical  spine  ; 
under  the  latter  muscle,  the  nerve  runs  downwards  immediately  internal  to  the 
vertebral  border  of  the  scapula.  The  great  auricular  and  superficial  cervical  nerves 
also  come  out  at  the  posterior  border  of  the  sterno-mastoid  about  the  middle  of  its 
length,  and  are  thence  directed,  the  great  auricular  upwards  to  the  ear,  and  the 
superficial  cervical  forwards  to  the  front  of  the  neck. 

For  the  back  of  the  neck,  see  p.  27. 


THE    CHEST.  19 

SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    TRUNK. 

THE     CHEST. 

On  the  front  of  the  chest,  the  greater  part  of  the  thoracic  wall  is  concealed  on 
each  side  by  the  pectoralis  major,  the  uppermost  portion  of  the  muscle  extending 
over  the  inner  half  of  the  clavicle  from  which  it  arises,  while  inferiorly,  it  forms  a 
prominent  curved  margin,  which  follows  the  direction  of  the  fifth  costal  cartilage. 
The  interval  between  the  clavicular  and  sterno-costal  portions  can  often  be  seen 
when  the  muscle  is  at  rest,  and  always  when  it  is  put  into  action  Externally,  the 
upper  and  lower  borders  of  the  muscle  converge  as  it  narrows  to  its  insertion  ;  the 
former  is  at  first  separated  from  the  adjacent  anterior  margin  of  the  deltoid  by  the 
wfradavicular  fossa,  but  lower  down  the  two  muscles  become  closely  united  ;  the 
lower  margin  of  the  pectoralis  major  leaves  the  chest  opposite  the  fifth  rib  (at  which 
spot  the  lowest  slip  of  the  pectoralis  minor  often  appears  on  the  surface)  and  forms, 
as  it  passes  upwards  and  outwards  to  the  arm,  the  rounded  anterior  axillary  fold, 
ending  in  the  sharp  tendon,  which  becomes  apparent  when  the  muscle  is  in  action. 
The  nipple  is  placed  over  the  outer  and  lower  part  of  the  pectoral  muscle,  generally 
between  the  fourth  and  fifth  ribs,  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch  (2  cm.)  external 
to  the  junction  of  the  bone  and  cartilage,  and  rather  more  than  four  inches  (10  cm.) 
from  the  middle  line  ;  but  its'position  varies  considerably  in  different  individuals,  and 
it  is  not  unfrequently,  especially  in  fat  persons  and  in  females,  at  a  much  lower  level. 

Along  the  middle  line,  the  sternum  is  subcutaneous  at  the  bottom  of  the  sternal 
groove  or  furrow  between  the  great  pectoral  muscles.  The  furrow  is  interrupted 
towards  the  upper  part  by  a  slight,  but  distinct,  transverse  ridge,  which  marks  the 
sternal  angle  formed  by  the  union  of  the  manubrium  and  the  body  of  the  sternum, 
and  on  each  side  of  this  the  second  costal  cartilage,  which  projects  forwards  more 
than  the  others,  continues  the  prominence  outwards.  Inferiorly,  the  sternal  furrow 
opens  out,  as  the  pectoral  muscles  diverge  from  one  another,  exposing  the  lower  end 
of  the  body  of  the  sternum,  a  spot  which  marks  the  articulation  of  the  seventh 
costal  cartilage,  and  which  is  always  to  be  readily  felt,  and  usually  distinctly  seen, 
owing  to  the  formation  of  the  infrasternal  depression  immediately  below  it.  The 
infrasternal  depression  (epigastric  fossa,  scrobiculus  cordis)  is  a  generally  well- 
marked,  although  variable,  hollow  between  the  seventh  costal  cartilages  and  the 
upper  ends  of  the  recti  muscles,  and  is  placed  over  the  ensiform  process,  which  is 
itself  seldom  visible  on  the  surface.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the  upper  margin 
of  the  sternum  is  on  a  level  (during  expiration)  with  the  disc  between  the  second 
and  third  dorsal  vertebrae  ;  the  junction  of  the  manubrium  and  body  is  opposite  the 
fifth  dorsal  vertebra  ;  and  the  xiphi-sternal  articulation  generally  corresponds  to  the 
lower  part  of  the  ninth  dorsal  vertebra. 

To  the  outer  side  of  the  pectoralis  major,  the  ribs  are  covered  by  the  serratus 
magnus.  Of  the  digitations  of  this  muscle,  the  first  to  appear,  at  the  lower  margin 
of  the  pectoralis  major,  is  the  one  attached  to  the  fifth  rib  ;  the  following  one,  the 
sixth,  is  the  largest  and  most  prominent,  and  they  become  less  marked  below  this. 
Below  the  pectoral  muscle,  the  wall  of  the  thorax  is  covered  by  the  rectus  abdominis 
internally,  and  the  external  oblique  laterally,  the  pointed  slips  of  the  latter  muscle 
being  received  between  the  digitations  of  the  serratus  magnus.  More  posteriorly, 
the  latissimus  dorsi  ascends  over  the  hinder  part  of  the  serratus,  and,  winding  round 
the  teres  major  muscle,  forms  the  thick  posterior  fold  of  the  axilla. 

The  ribs  may  generally  be  followed  without  difficulty  over  the  front  and  sides 
of  the  chest ;  but  only  a  very  small  portion  of  the  first  can  be  distinguished,  as  it  is 
almost  completely  covered  by  the  clavicle  and  scapula.  The  width  of  the  inter- 
costal spaces,  and  the  form  of  the  subcostal  angle  vary  greatly  in  accordance  with 

c  2 


20  SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY   OF   THE   TRUNK. 

the  shape  of  the  chest.  Thus,  in  a  long  narrow  chest  the  lower  ribs  slope  very  much 
downwards  and  are  near  to  one  another,  the  subcostal  angle  is  narrow,  and  the 
lateral  margin  of  the  thorax  reaches  nearly,  or  in  some  persons  quite,  as  far  as  the 
iliac  crest.  "When  the  chest  is  broad  the  opposite  conditions  are  found.  The  sub- 
costal angle  is  on  the  average  about  70°  in  the  male  and  75°  in  the  female,  but  it 
may  vary  from  60°  to  80°  (Charpy). 

The  lungs. — The  apex  of  the  lung  rises  above  the  anterior  end  of  the  first  rib 
and  the  clavicle  into  the  neck,  where  it  is  placed  behind  the  interval  between  the 
two  heads  of  the  sterno-mastoid,  being  covered  immediately  by  the  subclavian  artery 
and  scalenus  anticus  muscle.  Its  highest  point  is  on  a  level  with  the  neck  of  the 
first  rib  ;  and  it  projects  very  slightly,  if  at  all,  beyond  the  plane  of  that  rib.  The 
height  to  which  it  extends  above  the  clavicle  ranges  in  ordinary  circumstances  from 
half  an  inch  to  an  inch  (1 — 2*5  cm.),  but  sometimes  it  is  as  much  as  an  inch  and  three- 
quarters  (4  cm.),  while  in  other  cases  the  lung  does  not  project  at  all  above  the  bone. 
A  resonant  percussion-note  may,  however,  always  be  obtained  in  the  living  subject 
for  some  distance  above  the  clavicle,  owing  to  the  obliquity  of  the  surface  of  the  neck. 
The  distance  of  the  apex  from  the  clavicle  is  actually  diminished  during  inspiration, 
since  that  bone  is  then  moved  upwards  with  the  anterior  end  of  the  first  rib.  There 
does  not  appear  to  be  any  constant  difference  in  the  extent  upwards  of  the  lung  on 
the  two  sides,  but  it  is  not  uncommon  for  the  right  lung  to  be  somewhat  higher 
than  the  left.  From  the  apex,  the  anterior  border  of  each  lung  inclines  inwards 
behind  the  sterno-clavicular  articulation  and  the  manubrium,  to  the  junction  of  the 
latter  with  the  body  of  the  sternum,  where  the  two  almost  meet  in  the  middle  line  ; 
they  then  descend  together,  the  right  sometimes  projecting  a  little  to  the  left  of  the 
mid-line,  as  far  as  the  fourth  costal  cartilage  ;  from  this  point  the  margin  of  the 
right  lung  continues  a  nearly  straight  course  to  the  level  of  the  sixth  chondro-sternal 
articulation  (sometimes  even  to  the  lower  end  of  the  body  of  the  sternum),  while 
that  of  the  left  slopes  outwards  behind  the  fifth  costal  cartilage,  in  a  direction  which 
may  be  indicated  with  sufficient  accuracy  by  a  line  drawn  from  the  fourth  chondro- 
sternal  articulation  of  the  left  side  to  the  spot  on  the  chest-wall  corresponding  to  the 
apex  of  the  heart  (see  below). 

The  lower  limit  of  the  lung  may  be  marked  by  a  line,  slightly  convex  downwards, 
carried  round  the  side  of  the  chest  from  the  sixth  chondro-sternal  articulation  to 
the  tenth  dorsal  spine.  In  the  mamillary  line,  the  lung  extends  downwards  to  the 
sixth  rib ;  opposite  the  posterior  fold  of  the  axilla,  to  the  eighth  rib  ;  and  in  the 
scapular  line  (carried  vertically  downwards  from  the  lower  angle  of  the  scapula, 
while  the  arms  are  against  the  sides),  to  the  tenth  rib.  At  the  side  of  the  chest  the 
left  lung  often  descends  somewhat  beyond  these  limits.  This  margin  of  the  lung 
descends  considerably  in  inspiration,  and  rises  in  expiration.  The  position  of  the 
great  fissure  in  each  lung  may  be  ascertained  approximately  by  drawing  a  line  from 
the  second  dorsal  spine  to  the  sixth  rib  in  the  nipple-line  ;  and  the  smaller  fissure 
of  the  right  lung  extends  from  the  middle  of  the  foregoing  to  the  junction  of  the 
fourth  costal  cartilage  with  the  sternum. 

The  pleura  reaches  considerably  farther  downwards  than  the  lung.  Posteriorly, 
its  lower  margin  corresponds  most  frequently  to  the  head  of  the  twelfth  rib,  or  the 
eleventh  dorsal  spine  ;  it  is  seldom  higher  than  this,  but  often  lower,  in  many  cases 
extending  as  much  as  an  inch  (2*5  cm.)  beyond  the  spot  mentioned.  Being  directed 
at  first  horizontally  outwards,  its  line  then  ascends  gradually  over  the  side  of  the  chest, 
and  passes  behind  the  seventh  costal  cartilage  to  the  sternum,  from  which  point  it 
slopes  gradually  inwards  to  reach  the  middle  line  at  the  level  of  the  fifth  cartilages. 
As  the  pleurae  of  the  two  sides  are  almost  symmetrical  in  front,  the  left  extends 
considerably  farther  over  the  pericardium  than  the  corresponding  lung.  At  the 
side  of  the  chest,  the  line  of  reflection  of  the  pleura  is  generally  from  two  to  three 


THE    CHEST. 


21 


inches  (5 — 7  cm.)  above  the  lower  margin  of  the  thorax  :  towards  the  front,  it  is 
usually  a  little  lower  on  the  left  side  than  the  right. 

The  heart  and  great  vessels. — The  upper  limit  of  the  heart  is  represented  by 
a  line  passing  from  the  lower  border  of  the  second  costal  cartilage  of  the  left  side  to 
the  upper  border  of  the  third  cartilage  of  the  right  side  ;  the  lower  limit  by  a  line 


Fig.  10. — FRONT  VIEW  OP  THR  TRUNK,  SHOWING  THE  RELATIVE  POSITIONS  OP  THE  PRINCIPAL  THORACIC 
AND  ABDOMINAL  VISCERA,  &c.    |.     (R.  J.  G.  and  Gr.  D.  T.) 

The  outlines  of  the  lungs  and  their  large  fissures  are  indicated  by  thin  lines ;  the  position  of  the 
heart  and  great  vessels  (superior  vena  cava,  arch  of  aorta  and  pulmonary  artery),  as  well  as  below  the 
abdominal  aorta  and  the  common  and  external  iliac  arteries,  by  thick  lines  ;  the  liver  is  represented  by 
a  broken  line  ;  the  stomach  and  transverse  colon  by  thick  dotted  lines  ;  and  the  kidneys  by  thin 
dotted  lines. 

drawn  somewhat  obliquely,  and  with  a  slight  downward  convexity,  from  the  seventh 
chondro-sternal  articulation  of  the  right  side  to  the  apex,  the  latter  point  being  in  the 
fifth  intercostal  space,  about  three  and  a  half  inches  (9  cm.)  to  the  left  of  the  middle 


22  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE   TRUNK. 

line,  and  generally  about  an  inch  and  a  half  (4  cm.)  below,  and  three-quarters  of  an 
inch  (2  cm.)  to  the  sternal  side  of  the  nipple.  The  right  border  of  the  heart  is  indicated 
by  a  line  carried  from  the  third  to  the  seventh  chondro-sternal  articulation,  and 
arching  outwards  to  a  distance  of  one  inch  and  a  half  (4  cm.)  from  the  middle  line  ; 
the  left  border,  by  an  oblique  line,  convex  upwards,  extending  from  the  second  left 
costal  cartilage  to  the  apex.  The  area  thus  marked  out  corresponds  to  what  is  known 
as  the  deep  cardiac  dulness,  although  the  latter  can  hardly  be  traced  above  the  third 
costal  cartilage  of  the  left  side  ;  the  superficial  cardiac  dulness  corresponds  to  that 
part  of  the  heart  which  is  uncovered  by  lung,  and  thus  begins  at  the  inner  end  of  the 
fourth  left  cartilage,  extends  to  the  left  almost  to  the  apex,  to  the  right  as  far  as  the 
middle  line,  and  below  merges  into  the  dulness  which  answers  to  the  liver. 

The  pulmonary  orifice  is  placed  opposite  the  upper  margin  of  the  third  left  costal 
cartilage,  close  to  the  sternum,  whence  the  artery  proceeds  upwards  to  its  bifurcation 
behind  the  second  costal  cartilage  of  the  same  side,  which  is  therefore  termed  the 
pulmonary  cartilage.  The  orifice  of  the  aorta  is  below  and  a  little  internal  to  the 
pulmonary  orifice,  being  behind  the  sternum,  close  to  the  lower  border  of  the  third 
left  cartilage  ;  from  this  spot  the  ascending  aorta  passes  across  to  the  right  edge  of 
the  sternum  opposite  the  second  (aortic}  cartilage,  and  the  arch  then  returns  to  the 
left  side,  crossing  the  middle  line  about  an  inch  (2'5  cm.)  from  the  suprasternal 
depression.  Opposite  the  middle  point  of  the  manubrium,  the  innominate  and  left 
common  carotid  arteries  are  arising  close  together  from  the  upper  border  of  the  arch 
of  the  aorta,  and  they  pass  symmetrically  upwards,  the  innominate  to  the  back  of  the 
right,  and  the  carotid  to  the  back  of  the  left  sterno-clavicular  articulation.  The  left 
subclavian  artery  is  almost  directly  behind  the  left  carotid  in  the  thorax.  The  superior 
vena  cava  lies  to  the  right  of  the  arch,  behind  the  inner  ends  of  the  first  and  second 
intercostal  spaces  ;  and  the  left  innominate  vein,  resting  on  the  upper  border  of  the 
arch,  is  just  below  the  upper  margin  of  the  sternum.  It  sometimes  happens,  how- 
ever, especially  in  children,  that  the  arch  of  the  aorta  is  placed  at  a  higher  level 
than  usual,  and  then  the  left  innominate  vein  projects  upwards  into  the  neck.  In 
other  cases  the  innominate  artery  is  longer  than  usual,  and  may  be  felt  pulsating  in 
the  suprasternal  fossa. 

The  auriculo-ventricular  openings  of  the  heart  are  lower  down  than  the  arterial 
orifices,  the  left  being  behind  the  inner  end  of  the  fourth  left  costal  cartilage  and 
the  adjoining  part  of  the  sternum,  while  the  right  lies  behind  the  sternum  on  a 
level  with  the  fourth  interspace  and  fifth  cartilage. 

Arteries  of  the  thoracic  wall. — The  internal  mammary  artery  descends  behind 
the  costal  cartilages,  and  across  the  inner  ends  of  the  upper  six  intercostal  spaces, 
about  half  an  inch  (1  cm.)  from  the  margin  of  the  sternum  ;  and  it  occasionally  gives 
off  a  considerable  lateral  costal  branch  which  runs  downwards  on  the  inner  surface  of 
the  ribs  along  the  side  of  the  thorax  (Vol.  II,  p.  429).  The  intercostal  vessels  are 
lodged  for  the  greater  part  of  their  extent  in  the  grooves  beneath  the  lower  edges  of 
the  ribs,  by  which  they  are  thus  protected. 

THE    ABDOMEN. 

The  superficial  limits  of  the  abdomen  are  formed  above  by  the  lower  margin  or 
the  thorax,  and  below  by  Poupart's  ligament  and  the  iliac  crest  on  each  side,  the 
former  corresponding,  except  in  fat  persons,  to  the  curved  inguinal  furrow.  The 
abdominal  cavity,  however,  extends  considerably  beyond  these  limits,  both  upwards 
into  the  vault  of  the  diaphragm,  under  cover  of  the  lower  ribs  and  their  cartilages, 
and  downwards  into  the  hollow  of  the  pelvis.  The  abdomen  is  arbitrarily  divided 
into  nine  regions  by  two  horizontal  and  as  many  vertical  lines.  Of  the  horizontal 
lines,  one,  called  infracostal,  is  drawn  across  at  the  level  of  the  lowest  point  of  the 
tenth  costal  arch  on  each  side,  and  the  other,  which  may  be  termed  bi-iliac,  between 


THE    ABDOMEN.  23 

the  most  prominent-  points  (laterally)  of  the  two  iliac  crests.  A  horizontal  plane 
containing  the  infracostal  line  usually  cuts  some  part  of  the  third  lumbar  vertebra, 
while  the  bi-iliac  line  lies  in  a  plane  passing  through  the  body  of  the  fifth  lumbar 
vertebra  about  the  middle  of  its  anterior  surface,  and  about  an  inch  and  a  quarter 
below  the  highest  point  of  the  iliac  crest.  The  umbilicus  is  generally  from  an  inch 
and  a  quarter  to  an  inch  and  a  half  (3 — 4  cm.)  above  the  bi-iliac  line.  The  vertical 


Fig.  11. — OUTLINE  OF  THE  FRONT  OF  THE  ABDOMEN,  SHOWING 

THE    DIVISION    INTO    REGIONS. 

1,  epigastric  region  ;  2,  umbilical  ;  3,  hypogastric  ;  4,  4,  right 
and  left  hypochondriac  ;  5,  5,  right  and  left  lumbar  ;  6,  6,  right 
and  left  iliac. 

distance  between  the  infracostal  and  bi-iliac  planes 
raugesfrom  one  and  a  half  to  four  inches  (4 — 10  cm.), 
with  an  average  of  two  inches  and  three-quarters 
(7  cm.)1.  The  vertical  lines  (mid-Poupart  lines)  are 
drawn  upwards  from  the  centre  of  Poupart's  ligament 
on  each  side  :  above  the  bi-iliac  line  they  nearly 
coincide  with  the  lineae  semilunares,  and  are  usually 
a  little  external  to  the  outer  borders  of  the  recti. 

Of  the  spaces  bounded  by  these  lines,  the  three 
central  are  called  respectively,  from  above  down- 
wards, epigastric,  umbilical,  and  hypogastric,  and  the 
lateral  ones,  right  and  left  hypochondriac,  lumbar  or  lateral  abdominal,  and  iliac. 
The  lowest  portion  of  the  hypogastric  region,  being  covered  with  hair,  is  also  referred 
to  as  thepubes  or  pubic  region  ;  and  the  adjacent  parts  of  the  iliac  and  hypogastric 
regions  together  constitute  what  is  known  as  the  inguinal  region  or  the  groin. 


The  viscera  which 
following  table  : — 

Epigastric  region    .... 

Hypochondriac,  right .  . 
Hypochondriac,  left   .  . 


Umbilical . 


Lumbar,  right  ........ 


Lumbar,  left 
Hypogastric 


Iliac,  right 
Iliac,  left. . 


are  contained  in  the  several  regions  are  shown  in   the 

The  greater  part  or  the  whole  of  the  left  lobe,  and  part  of  the 
right  lobe  of  the  liver,  with  the  gall-bladder,  part  of  the  stomach, 
including  both  orifices,  the  first  and  second  parts  of  the  duodenum, 
the  duodeno-jejunal  flexure,  the  pancreas,  upper  or  inner  end  of  the 
spleen,  parts  of  the  kidneys,  and  the  suprarenal  bodies. 

The  greater  part  of  the  right  lobe  of  the  liver,  the  hepatic  flexure 
of  the  colon,  and  part  of  the  right  kidney. 

Part  of  the  stomach,  with  the  greater  portion  of  the  spleen  and 
the  tail  of  the  pancreas,  the  splenic  flexure  of  the  colon,  part  of  the 
left  kidney,  and  sometimes  a  part  of  the  left  lobe  of  the  liver. 

The  greater  part  of  the  transverse  colon,  the  third  part  of  the 
duodenum,  some  convolutions  of  the  jejunum  and  ileum,  with 
portions  of  the  mesentery  and  great  omentum,  and  part  of  the 
right,  or  sometimes  of  both  kidneys. 

The  ascending  colon,  part  of  the  right  kidney,  and  sometimes 
part  of  the  ileum. 

The  descending  colon,  part  of  the  jejunum,  and  sometimes  a  small 
part  of  the  left  kidney. 

The  convolutions  of  the  ileum,  the  bladder  in  children,  and  when 
distended  in  adults  also,  the  uterus  when  in  the  gravid  state,  and 
behind,  the  sigmoid  loop  and  upper  part  of  the  rectum. 

The  cascum  with  the  vermiform  appendix,  and  the  termination  of 
the  ileum. 

The  sigmoid  colon,  convolutions  of  the  jejunum  and  ileum. 


Abdominal  wall.  —  The  wall  of  the  abdomen  is  formed  at  the  front  and  sides 
mainly  by  muscles,  and  the  forms  to  be  recognized  on  the  surface  are  for  the  most 


1  See  D.  J.  Cunningham,  Delimitation  of  the  Regiom  of  the  Abdomen,  Journal  of  Anatomy,  xxviii, 
1893. 


24  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY   OF   THE   TRUNK. 

part  to  be  referred  to  these.  Anteriorly,  the  rectus  muscle  extends  on  each  side  of 
the  middle  line  from  the  pelvis  to  the  thorax,  its  tendinous  inscriptions  producing 
transverse  furrows,  of  which  two  are  commonly  to  be  recognized,  one  opposite,  or 
just  below,  the  tip  of  the  eusiform  process,  and  the  other  about  midway  between 
this  and  the  umbilicus.  In  some  cases  the  third  may  be  distinguished  about  the 
level  of  the  umbilicus.  Between  the  two  recti  is  a  median  groove  (abdominal 
furrow}  continued  downwards  from  the  infrasternal  fossa,  along  the  surface  of  the 
linea  alba,  as  far  as,  or  a  little  beyond,  the  umbilicus,  where  it  gradually  disappears 
owing  to  the  approximation  and  eventual  union  of  the  muscles  of  the  two  sides. 
The  lower  ends  of  the  recti  are  concealed  by  a  small  accumulation  of  fat. 

The  position  of  the  umbilicus  is  subject  to  considerable  variation,  but  it  is 
always  below  the  centre  of  the  distance  between  the  xiphi-sternal  articulation  and 
the  pubic  symphysis.     It  is  generally  on  a  level  with,  or  slightly  above,  the  highest 
point  of  the  iliac  crest,  and  opposite  the  upper  part  of  the  fourth,  or  the  dis 
between  the  third  and  fourth  lumbar  vertebras. 

A  line  joining  the  two  anterior  superior  iliac -spines  usually  passes  just  above  the 
promontory  of  the  sacrum. 

The  convex  surface  of  the  side  of  the  abdomen  is  formed  by  the  fleshy  part  of 
the  external  oblique  muscle,  the  outline  of  which  can  often  be  seen  in  front  and 
below.  Between  this  and  the  outer  edge  of  the  rectus  there  is  a  shallow  depression 
over  the  upper  portion  of  the  linea  semilunaris  :  this  depression  terminates  above 
at  the  margin  of  the  thorax,  in  the  somewhat  triangular  infracostal  fossa,  the  upper 
boundary  of  which  is  formed  by  the  rounded  ninth  costal  cartilage. 

In  the  inguinal  region,  the  superior  set  of  glands  may  usually  be  felt  lying  along 
Poupart's  ligament.  The  external  abdominal  ring  is  placed  immediately  above 
and  external  to  the  pubic  spine,  which  can  always  be  readily  felt,  as  well  as  the 
common  attachment  of  the  outer  pillar  of  the  ring  and  Poupart's  ligament.  By 
invaginating  the  scrotum  at  some  distance  from  the  aperture,  the  ringer  may  be 
passed  through  the  ring  into  the  lower  part  of  the  inguinal  canal.  The  internal  or 
deep  abdominal  ring  is  situated  about  half  an  inch  (1  cm.)  above  Poupart's  ligament, 
opposite  a  spot  midway  between  the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine  and  the  pubic 
symphysis  ;  and  the  deep  epigastric  artery  runs  upwards  close  to  the  inner  side  of 
this  opening,  in  the  direction  of  a  line  inclining  inwards  towards  the  umbilicus.  If 
the  inguinal  canal  has  been  enlarged  by  the  presence  of  an  old  hernia,  the  rings 
are  almost  opposite  to  one  another,  and  the  finger  may  be  passed  through  them  and 
can  explore  the  surrounding  parts  in  the  interior  of  the  abdomen. 

The  superficial  epigastric  vein  is  often  seen  through  the  skin,  and  it  may 
frequently  be  observed  to  communicate  with  another  vein  (v.  thoraco-epigastrica) 
that  passes  up  into  the  armpit  to  join  the  axillary  vein,  especially  if  there  be  any 
obstruction  to  the  return  of  the  blood  through  the  inferior  vena  cava. 

Abdominal  viscera. — The  liver,  which  occupies  the  whole  of  the  arch  of 
the  diaphragm  on  the  right,  as  well  as  a  part  on  the  left  side,  is  placed  for  the 
most  part  under  cover  of  the  ribs.  In  the  right  hypochondriac  region,  its  lower 
margin  just  corresponds  to  the  lower  border  of  the  thorax,  but  in  the  epigastric 
region,  a  part  of  both  right  and  left  lobes  comes  into  contact  with  the  abdominal 
wall ;  the  margin  of  this  part  runs  obliquely  across  the  subcostal  angle  from  the 
ninth  right  to  the  eighth  left  costal  cartilage,  and  crosses  the  middle  line  about  a 
hand's  breadth  below  the  xiphi-sternal  articulation.  The  gall-bladder  projects 
beyond  this  margin  immediately  internal  to  the  ninth  costal  cartilage,  and  close  to 
the  outer  edge  of  the  rectus  muscle,  i.e.,  opposite  the  infracostal  fossa.  The  extent  of 
the  liver  upwards,  if  traced  on  the  surface  of  the  body,  is  marked  by  a  line  crossing 
the  body  of  the  sternum  close  to  its  lower  end,  and  rising  on  the  right  side  to  the 
level  of  the  fifth  chondro-sternal  articulation,  on  the  left  to  that  of  the  sixth.  A 


THE   ABDOMEN.  25 

little  internal  to  the  right  mamillary  line,  it  generally  reaches  as  high  as  the  fourth 
intercostal  space,  or  nearly  to  the  level  of  the  nipple.  On  the  left  side  it  does  not 
usually  extend  more  than  an  inch  and  a  half  or  two  inches  (4 — 5  cm.)  beyond  the 
margin  of  the  sternum  (see  fig.  10).  It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  the  liver 
is  subject  to  great  variations,  not  only  in  size,  but  also  in  position,  both  temporarily 
and  permanently.  Thus,  it  sinks  with  inspiration,  and  rises  in  expiration  ;  it 
descends  slightly  on  assuming  the  upright  position  ;  and  it  is  frequently  moved 
downwards  by  alterations1  in  the  shape  of  the  chest.  It  is  relatively  very  large  in 
the  infant  and  child,  and  extends  across  far  into  the  left  hypochondriac  region. 
In  adults,  the  margin  of  the  liver  is  seldom  to  be  felt  below  the  ribs  on  the  right 
side  during  health,  unless  the  abdominal  wall  be  unusually  thin. 

The  stomach  lies  in  the  left  hypochondriac  and  the  epigastric  regions,  in  the 
latter  being  partly  covered  by  the  liver  and  partly  in  contact  with  the  abdominal 
wall.  Its  cardiac  orifice  is  situated  behind  the  seventh  costal  cartilage  of  the  left 
side  about  an  inch  (2'5  cm.)  from  the  sternum,  and  at  a  depth  of  about  four  inches 
(10  cm.)  from  the  surface.  The  pyloric  orifice  is  from  three  to  four  inches  (8 — 
10  cm.)  below  the  xiphi-stemal  articulation,  and,  when  the  stomach  is  contracted, 
in  or  immediately  to  the  right  of  the  median  plane ;  but  when  the  stomach  is 
distended,  the  pyloric  end  moves  considerably  to  the  right.  The  pyloric  orifice  is 
much  nearer  to  the  surface  than  the  cardiac.  The  f  undus  of  the  stomach  is  directed 
upwards  into  the  left  portion  of  the  vault  of  the  diaphragm,  and  reaches,  under 
ordinary  circumstances,  to  the  level  of,  or  somewhat  higher  than,  the  sixth  chondro- 
sternal  articulation,  or  in  the  mamillary  line  to  the  fifth  rib,  being  a  little  above 
(and  behind)  the  apex  of  the  heart.  The  great  curvature  of  the  stomach  is  directed 
at  first  to  the  left,  and  afterwards  downwards,  the  latter  part  reaching,  with  a 
moderate  degree  of  distension  of  the  organ,  about  as  far  as  the  infracostal  line. 

Large  intestine. — The  transverse  colon  passes  across  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
umbilical  region,  following  closely  the  great  curvature  of  the  stomach.  The  csecum 
is  comparatively  superficial  in  the  right  iliac  region  ;  the  ascending  colon  and  the 
hepatic  flexure  are  deeply  placed  in  the  right  lumbar  and  hypochondriac  regions. 
The  splenic  flexure  reaches  a  higher  level  than  the  hepatic,  and  is  situated 
behind  the  stomach  in  the  left  hypochondriac  region,  while  the  descending  colon 
occupies  the  hinder  part  of  the  left  hypochondriac  and  lumbar  regions.  Deep 
pressure  on  the  left  side  detects  the  sigmoid  colon  as  it  passes  over  the  brim  of  the 
pelvis,  in  thin  persons  even  when  comparatively  empty  ;  if  distended  with  faeces,  it 
forms  a  distinct  tumour  in  this  situation. 

Small  intestine. — The  intestines  below  the  stomach  are  all  covered  more  or 
less  completely  by  the  great  omentum.  The  coils  of  the  small  intestine  occupy  the 
anterior  part  of  the  belly  below  the  transverse  colon,  those  of  the  jejunum  being 
principally  found  above,  those  of  the  ileum  below.  The  upper  limit  of  the  attach- 
ment of  the  mesentery,  corresponding  to  the  duodeno-jejunal  flexure,  is  commonly 
between  three  and  four  inches  (8 — 10  cm.)  above  the  umbilicus  and  slightly  to 
the  left  of  the  median  line,  while  the  lower  end  is,  on  an  average,  four  inches 
(10  cm.)  from  the  centre  of  Poupart's  ligament  of  the  right  side,  along  a  line 
directed  upwards  and  somewhat  inwards,  following  the  course  of  the  psoas  muscle 
(Lockwood).  The  termination  of  the  ileum  in  the  large  intestine  corresponds 
generally  to  a  spot  on  the  anterior  abdominal  wall  from  one  to  two  inches  (3 — 5  cm.) 
internal  to,  and  slightly  above,  the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine. 

In  children  under  ordinary  circumstances,  and  in  adults  when  it  is  distended, 
the  bladder  rises  out  of  the  pelvis  into  the  hypogastric  region,  being  closely  applied 
to  the  anterior  abdominal  wall  without  the  intervention  of  peritoneum  for  some 
distance  above  the  pubic  bones  ;  if  the  distension  be  excessive,  the  bladder  may 
reach  nearly  as  far  as  the  umbilicus. 


26 


SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE   TRUNK. 


The  kidneys,  being  situated  at  the  back  of  the  abdominal  cavity,  are  not  to  be 
felt  under  normal  conditions,  or  at  most  the  right  is  at  times  to  be  detected.  They 
are  lodged  on  each  side  mainly  in  the  epigastric  and  hypochondriac  regions.  That 
of  the  right  side  usually  extends  slightly  into  the  umbilical  and  lumbar  regions ; 
but  on  the  left  side  the  organ  is  frequently  altogether  above  the  infracostal  plane. 


Fig.  12. — DETERMINATION  OF  THE  POSITION  OF  THE  KIDNEYS  ON  THE  FRONT  OF  THE  BODY  :   SCHEME. 

(R.  J.  G.  ar,dG.  D.  T.) 


The  inferior  pole  of  the  kidney  is  about  two  and  a  half  to  three  inches  (6 — 7  cm.) 
from  the  median  plane,  and  on  the  right  side  is  about  an  inch  (2 — 3  cm.)  above  the 
level  of  the  umbilicus,  while  on  the  left  side  it  is  in  the'majority  of  cases  about  half 
an  inch  (1 — 2  cm.)  higher.  The  length  of  the  kidney  being  generally  from  four  to 
four  and  a  half  inches  (10 — 12  cm.),  the  position  of  the  superior  pole  is  indicated 
by  a  spot  a  corresponding  distance  above  the  level  of  the  inferior  pole,  and  about 
two  inches  (5  cm.)  from  the  middle  line.  This  spot  is  above  the  margin  of  the 
thorax,  and  is  generally  over  the  sixth  or  seventh  costal  cartilage,  about  the  place 
where  the  interchondral  articulation  is  formed  between  these  cartilages.  The 
shortest  distance  between  the  two  kidneys,  at  the  upper  part  of  their  mesial  borders, 


THE    BACK.  27 

measures  about  two  and  a  half  inches  (6  cm.):  the  hilum,  which  looks  mainly 
forwards,  is  about  two  inches  (5  cm.)  from  the  median  plane. 

Like  other  abdominal  organs,  the  kidneys  are  subject  to  considerable  variations 
in  size  and  position  ;  and  they  are  frequently  found  at  a  lower  level  than  that  just 
given.  In  the  female  they  are  situated  as  a  rule  slightly  lower  than  in  the  male  ; 
and  during  childhood,  when  the  kidneys  are  relatively  of  large  size,  they  are  at  the 
same  time  lower  and  more  symmetrically  placed  than  in  the  adult.1 

The  pancreas  lies  over  the  first  and  second  lumbar  vertebrae,  from  two  and  a 
half  to  five  inches  (6  to  12  cm.)  above  the  umbilicus  ;  and  the  third  part  of 
the  duodenum  crosses  the  spine  at  a  lower  level,  often  reaching  nearly  to  the 
umbilicus. 

Abdominal  vessels. — The  abdominal  aorta  commences  rather  above  the  mid- 
point between  the  infrasternal  depression  and  the  umbilicus,  and  passes  downwards 
usually  a  little  to  the  left  of  the  middle  line  of  the  body,  although  its  lower  end 
often  occupies  a  median  position,  or  may  even  extend  over  slightly  to  the  right. 
The  bifurcation  occurs  on  the  average  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch  (2  cm.)  below 
the  umbilicus,  and  the  direction  of  the  common  and  external  iliac  arteries  is  indicated 
by  drawing  a  line  from  this  point  to  another  midway  between  the  pubic  syrnphysis 
and  the  anterior  superior  spine  of  the  ilium.  The  inferior  vena  cava  lies  just  to  the 
right  of  the  aorta. 

The  creliac  axis  arises  opposite  the  lower  part  of  the  last  dorsal  vertebra,  i.e., 
between  four  and  five  inches  (10 — 12  cm.)  above  the  umbilicus ;  the  superior 
mesenteric  artery  a  very  little  lower  ;  the  two  renal  arteries  from  three  and  a 
half  to  four  inches  (9 — 10  cm.),  and  the  inferior  mesenteric  about  one  inch 
(2'5  cm.)  above  the  umbilicus. 

THE    BACK. 

At  the  back  of  the  neck,  a  slight  median  depression — the  nuchal furroiv,  com- 
mencing immediately  below  the  external  occipital  protuberance — descends  over  the 
ligamentum  nuchae,  between  the  prominences  formed  by  the  complexus  and  trapezius 
muscles  of  the  two  sides.  By  pressing  deeply  in  this  furrow,  the  spine  of  the  axis  is 
readily  felt,  and  generally  also  the  spines  of  the  third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  cervical 
vertebras  less  distinctly.  The  furrow  disappears  gradually  towards  the  root  of  the 
neck,  where  the  spines  of  the  seventh  cervical  and  upper  one  or  two  dorsal  vertebras 
become  visible.  The  first  spine  to  appear  is  usually  that  of  the  seventh  cervical 
vertebra,  but  sometimes  the  sixth  is  long  and  comes  to  the  surface  :  the  most 
prominent  is  the  first  dorsal.  They  necessarily  project  more  plainly  when  the  neck 
is  inclined  forwards.  Below  these,  the  long  spinal  or  dorso-lumbar  furroiv  descends 
in  the  middle  line  between  the  elevations  formed  by  the  erector  spinae  muscles 
covered  on  each  side  above  by  the  trapezius  and  below  by  the  latissimus  dorsi.  The 
furrow  is  deepest  in  the  lower  dorsal  and  upper  lumbar  regions,  where  the  muscles 
are  thickest  and  most  fleshy  ;  in  the  lower  lumbar  region  and  over  the  upper  part  of 
the  sacrum,  the  erector  muscles  are  tendinous,  and  give  rise  to  a  somewhat  lozenge- 
shaped  flattened  area  through  which  the  groove  is  continued,  becoming  gradually 
shallower,  to  terminate  at  the  spine  of  the  third  piece  of  the  sacrum  (last  sacral 
spine)  in  the  angle  formed  by  the  meeting  of  the  right  and  left  gluteus  maximus 
muscles.  A  little  above  and  external  to  this  point,  a  slight  depression  indicates  the 
position  of  the  posterior  superior  iliac  spine.  At  the  bottom  of  the  spinal  furrow, 
the  spines  may  be  felt  and  counted,  the  middle  dorsal  ones  generally  with  consider 
able  difficulty  in  the  erect  position,  but  most  of  them  are  rendered  very  evident  by 

1  See  Second  Annual  Report  of  Committee  of  Collective  Investigation  of  Anat.  Soc.,  1890-91,  by 
Arthur  Thomson,  Journ.  Anat.,  xxvi,  83;  also  F.  Helm,  Beitriiye  zur  Kenntniss  der  Niercn-Topo- 
graphie,  Diss.,  Berlin,  1895.  ' 


28  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE    TRUNK. 

bending  the  column  forwards.  The  fourth  lumbar  spine  is  on  a  level  with  the 
highest  part  of  the  crest  of  the  ilium :  the  third  lumbar  spine  is  generally  somewhat 
higher  than  the  umbilicus. 

The  spine  of  the  scapula  is  easily  felt  beneath  the  skin,  and  may  be  traced  out- 
wards (very  little  upwards  when  the  arm  is  hanging)  to  the  acromion,  which  is 
represented  on  the  surface  by  a  depression  in  a  muscular  subject,  or  when  the  arm 
is  raised.  The  lower  border  of  the  spine  and  the  outer  border  of  the  acromion  meet 
in  the  prominent  acromial  angle,  which  is  always  to  be  distinctly  recognized  on  the 
surface ;  from  this  point  measurements  of  the  length  of  the  arm  are  most 
conveniently  taken.  The  vertebral  border  and  the  inferior  angle  of  the  scapula  are 
seen,  although  covered  for  the  most  part  by  muscles,  the  former  by  the  trapezius, 
the  latter  by  the  latissimus  dorsi.  The  superior  border  cannot  usually  be 
distinguished,  but  the  axillary  border  can  be  felt  more  or  less  distinctly  through  its 
thick  muscular  covering.  With  the  arms  hanging  by  the  side,  the  upper  angle  of 
the  scapula  corresponds  to  the  upper  border  of  the  second  rib,  or  the  interval 
between  the  first  and  second  dorsal  spines  ;  the  lower  angle  to  the  seventh  inter- 
costal space  (sometimes  the  eighth  rib)  or  the  interval  between  the  seventh  and 
.eighth  dorsal  spines  ;  and  the  root  of  the  spine  of  the  scapula  to  the  interval 
between  the  third  and  fourth  dorsal  spines.  The  vertebral  border  of  the  bone  is  at 
the  same  time  nearly  perpendicular. 

At  the  inner  end  of  the  spine  of  the  scapula,  a  distinct  depression  indicates  the 
triangular  tendon  in  which  the  lower  fibres  of  the  trapezius  end  ;  and  a  slight  groove, 
which  is  seen  at  times  passing  upwards  and  outwards  over  the  surface  of  the 
eminence  formed  by  the  erector  spinae,  in  the  direction  of  a  line  from  one  of  the 
lowest  dorsal  spines  to  the  triangular  tendon,  marks  the  lower  edge  of  the  muscle. 
Immediately  above  the  spine  of  the  scapula  is  a  convex  surface  formed  by  the 
thickest  part  of  the  trapezius  covering  the  supraspinatus  muscle  ;  and  above  this,  the 
sloping  surface  leading  down  from  the  neck  to  the  shoulder  is  formed  by  the  upper 
part  of  the  trapezius,  supported  by  the  levator  anguli  scapula  and  by  fat. 

The  lower  ribs  are  to  be  felt  through  the  latissimus  dorsi,  outside  the  edge  of  the 
erector  spinas  ;  but  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  twelfth  rib  is  often  very  short 
and  does  not  project  beyond  the  margin  of  the  erector  muscle,  so  that  the  lowest  rib 
that  can  then  be  felt  is  the  eleventh.  The  ribs  should,  therefore,  always  be  counted 
from  above  downwards,  and  not  from  below  upwards. 

The  lower  end  of  the  larynx  and  pharynx,  and  the  commencement  of  the 
trachea  and  oesophagus  are  about  on  a  level  with  the  interval  between  the  sixth  and 
seventh  cervical  spines.  From  this  spot  the  trachea  descends,  at  first  in  the  middle 
line,  and  then  inclining  slightly  to  the  right  divides  opposite  the  fourth  dorsal  spine 
into  the  two  bronchi.  The  latter  are  thence  directed  outwards  and  downwards,  the 
right  usually  more  nearly  in  the  line  of  the  trachea,  and  the  left  becoming  more 
transverse  in  direction,  to  the  hilum  of  the  lung,  which  they  enter  about  the  level 
of  the  fifth  dorsal  spine.  In  the  lung  the  main  prolongation  of  the  bronchus 
descends,  accompanied  by  corresponding  pulmonary  vessels,  which  are  placed 
dorsally  to  the  air-tube,  about  one  and  a  half  or  two  inches  (4 — 5  cm.)  from  the 
median  plane,  towards  the  hinder  part  of  the  base  of  the  lung. 

Lungs  and  pleurae. — The  apex  of  the  lung,  corresponding  to  the  neck  of  the 
first  rib,  extends  up  to  the  level  of  the  seventh  cervical  spine.  Mesially,  the  lungs 
touch  the  sides  of  the  bodies  of  the  vertebras ;  and  inferiorly,  they  reach  down  to 
the  tenth  dorsal  spine,  the  pleura  to  the  eleventh  or  even  lower,  as  has  already  been 
described  (p.  20). 

The  oesophagus,  from  its  commencement,  inclines  at  first  somewhat  to  the  left, 
but  regains  the  middle  line  about  the  fifth  dorsal  vertebra  ;  in  its  lower  part  it  is 
deflected  more  considerably  to  the  left,  and  it  terminates  at  the  cardiac  orifice  of  the 


THE    BACK. 


29 


stomach  about  on  a  level  with  the  ninth  dorsal  spine.     The  pyloric  orifice  of  the 
stomach,  is  to  the  right  of  the  twelfth  dorsal  spine. 

Aorta. — The  arch  of  the  aorta  reaches  the  left  side  of  the  vertebral  column  just 
above  the  fourth  dorsal  spine,  and  the  descending  aorta  passes  downwards,  gradually 


Fig.  13. — POSTERIOR  VIEW   OP   THE    TRUNK,  SHOWING   THE    RELATIVE    POSITIONS   OP    THE   PRINCIPAL 

THORACIC    AND    ABDOMINAL    VISCERA,    &C.       (R.   J.   Gr.  and  G.  D.  T.)       i. 

The  several  objects  are  indicated  in  the  same  manner  as  in  fig.  10,  the  trachea  and  lungs  by  thin 
lines,  the  aorta  by  thick  lines,  the  liver,  pancreas  and  spleen  by  broken  lines,  the  oesophagus,  stomach, 
ascending  and  descending  colon  by  thick  dotted  lines,  and  the  kidneys  by  thin  dotted  lines  ;  x ,  x  , 
seventh  cervical  and  first  lumbar  spines. 

inclining  to  the  front  of  the  column,  to  bifurcate  at  a'spot  in,  or  close  to,  the  median 
plane,  on  a  level  with  the  fourth  lumbar  spine.  The  cceliac  axis  arises  opposite  the 
twelfth  dorsal,  the  renal  arteries  opposite  the  first  lumbar  spine. 

The  convex  surface  of  the  spleen  looks  backwards  and  somewhat  outwards.     It 


30  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE   TRUNK. 

is  placed  beneath  the  ninth,  tenth  and  eleventh  ribs  of  the  left  side,  being  separated 
from  them  by  the  diaphragm,  and  at  its  upper  part  also  by  the  lung.  It  lies  very 
obliquely,  its  long  axis  coinciding  almost  exactly  with  the  line  of  the  tenth  rib.  Its 
highest  and  lowest  points  are  on  a  level  respectively  with  the  ninth  dorsal  and  first 


Fig.  14. — OUTLINE  VIEW  OP  THE  KIDNEYS  FROM  BEHIND,  CONSTRUCTED  FROM  A  SERIES  OF  HORIZONTAL 

SECTIONS    THROUGH    THE    TRUNK    OF    AN    ADULT    MALE.       (J.   Symington.) 

R.K.,  L.K.,  right  and  left  kidneys ;  E.S.,  outer  border  of  erector  spinae  muscle  ;  Q.L..  outer  border 
of  quadratus  lumborum  muscle  ;  i.e. ,  iliac  crest  ;  p.  p. ,  dotted  line  to  show  lower  limit  of  costal  pleura. 
In  this  case  the  two  kidneys  were  nearly  symmetrical  in  position. 


lumbar  spines  ;  its  inner  end  is  distant  about  an  inch  and  a  half  (4  cm.)  from  the 
median  plane  of  the  body,  and  its  outer  end  about  reaches  the  mid-axillary  line. 

Kidneys. — The  upper  end  of  the  right  kidney  reaches  to  the  level  of  the 
eleventh  dorsal  spine  ;  the  lower  end  is  on  an  average  one  inch  (2-5  cm.)  above 
the  iliac  crest,  and  a  little  below  the  level  of  the  second  lumbar  spine  ;  the  hilum 
is  opposite  the  first  lumbar  spine.  The  last  rib,  when  well  developed,  is  sloped 
downwards  and  outwards  at  an  angle  of  about  45°  with  the  vertical,  and  crosses  the 
posterior  surface  of  the  kidney  in  such  a  way  that  about  one-third  of  the  organ  is 
under  cover  of  the  thoracic  wall.  The  left  kidney  is,  as  a  rule,  about  half  an  inch 
(1 — 2  cm.)  higher  than  the  right.  In  the  female  and  child  the  kidneys  are  some- 
what lower  than  in  the  adult  male,  and  not  unfrequently  reach  down  as  far  as  the 
iliac  crest  (cf.  p.  26). 


THE    BACK. 


31 


Colon. — The  ascending  and  descending  portions  of  the  colon  pass  vertically 
along  the  outermost  part  of  the  right  and  left  kidneys  respectively  ;  the  part  of  the 

Fig.   15. — DIAGRAM  SHOWING   THE  VARYING   RELATIONS  OP   THE   ROOT-  ""--^I" 

ORIGINS    OF    THE    SPINAL    NERVES    TO    THE    SPINES    OF    THE  VERTEBRA.  fRj     "°  CERV'CAt 

(After  R.  W.  Reid.)  4« CE*V,CA J Ui 

intestine  which  is  in  contact  with  the  abdominal  wall  is 
placed  immediately  internal  to  a  line  carried  vertically  up- 
wards from  the  central  point  of  the  iliac  crest. 

The  pancreas  crosses  the  spinal  column  opposite  the 
twelfth  dorsal  and  first  lumbar  spines,  and  the  third  part 
of  the  duodenum  from  the  second  to  the  third  lumbar 
spine. 

Spinal  cord  and  origins  of  spinal  nerves. — The 
lower  end  of  the  spinal  cord  in  the  adult  corresponds 
generally  to  the  interspace  .between  the  first  and  second 
lumbar  spines,  and  is  not  subject  to  much  variation  in 
level ;  but  in  the  infant  it  reaches  to  the  third  lumbar 
spine.  The  cervical  enlargement  extends  downwards  to 
about  the  seventh  cervical  spine,  and  the  lumbar  enlarge- 
ment corresponds  mainly  to  the  last  three  dorsal  spines. 

The  relations  of  the  origins  of  the  spinal  nerve-roots  to 
the  spinous  processes  of  the  vertebrse  vary  to  some  extent 
in  different  individuals,  especially  in  the  thoracic  region, 
the  range  of  any  given  dorsal  nerve-root  being  about  equal 
to  the  distance  between  three  adjoining  spines,  or  two 
interspinous  intervals,  as  is  shown  in  the  accompanying 
diagram  (fig.  15)  constructed  from  the  observations  of 
R.  W.  Reid  upon  six  subjects.  The  following  rules  will, 
however,  serve  to  indicate  with  sufficient  accuracy  the 
average  position  of  the  several  nerve-roots  : — The  second 
cervical  nerve  arises  opposite  the  neural  arch  of  the  atlas, 
the  third  opposite  the  spine  of  the  axis,  and  the  fourth 
opposite  the  interval  between  the  second  and  third  cervical 
spines.  The  lower  four  cervical  nerves  arise  each  opposite 
the  spine  of  the  second  vertebra  above  the  place  of  exit  of 
the  nerve  from  the  spinal  canal.  The  origins  of  the  upper 
six  dorsal  nerves  are  about  on  a  level  with  the  spines  of 
the  third,  and  of  the  lower  six  with  the  spines  of  the 
fourth  vertebra  above  their  respective  places  of  exit.  The 
lumbar  nerves  arise  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  tenth 
and  eleventh  dorsal  spines,  and  the  sacral  nerves  between 
the  eleventh  dorsal  and  first  lumbar  spines. 


I2TH  DORSAL' 


W 
H 

O 
EH 


O 

»—  i 

EH 


as 


02 

w 


w 

EH 


o 

w 

oc 


P5 


. 

a 

1 

<D 

OJ 

| 

e 

"o 

'o      5 

£•1 

*C 

•£         cS 

« 

C3 

05           S 

^ 

"3 

'o      «« 

I 

e 

O           oj 

S 

§ 

u 

B 

h 

f^ 

^t 

-§ 

2 

P* 

O 

£ 

t? 

3  „• 

°S 

Jl 

' 

fl 

"E<^ 

So 

'-P  3 

^)  C3 

oj 

§.§ 

.a 

•fi 

i-J 

«M 

-^ 

ci 

m 

'« 

— 
3 

c 

5 

o 

•|~5 

X 

'Sc 

'§ 

O) 

C 
>-) 

ra 

1 

2 

a 

•* 

tc 

a 

0 

.2 

^ 

^ 

*^ 

& 

^H 

s 

(M 

. 

^» 

x' 

0 

0 

a  •*> 

^-* 

CQ     r4 

Objects,  with  average  p 

Soft  palate  and  mouth. 

Base  of  tongue. 
Upper  end  of  epiglottis.  Angle 

Hyoid  bone.  Superior  aperture  < 
cation  of  common  carotid  artei 

"o 
"tc 

C4 

_s 

i 

3 
o 

'p 

1° 
1 

6 

Lower  end  of  pharynx  and  lary; 
trachea  and  oesophagus. 

Arch  of  thoracic  duct. 

Apex  of  lung.  Summit  of  arch  of 
Acromio-clavicular  articulatiol 

Upper  angle  of  scapula. 

Bifurcation,  of  innominate  artery, 

°E 

1 
1 

o 

~ 

*? 

1 

13 

*  >-5 

0 

*rr" 

*c 

*^ 

"^ 

"C 

& 

1 

CQ 

«3 

;|^' 

o.S 

CO 

S 

o 

3 

5 

0 

1 

« 

o 

1 

V 

0 

•TJ 

1 

O 

5< 

"fl 

^t* 

in 

CO 

J>^ 

co 

r-5 

<N 

CO 

rii 

CO 

• 

Jodies  of 
ertcbras. 

cj  o 

,  cerv. 

.  cerv. 

,  cerv. 

ri 

a 

o 

i 

.  cerv. 

02 

0 

•d 

09 

mff 

r^« 

CO 

* 

0 

6 

*" 

TH 

0) 

P 

d 

d 

d  d 

d 

'S  -2 

.2 

o 

.2.2 

_2 

'S  ^ 

-4-» 

03 

3s  3s 

•"^ 

"3 

r£ 

S3           o    * 

2^ 

O 

0 

oo  i  .y  o 

g 

!£3 

"-P  vn     ~j|  '4^ 

IN 

S 

03 

S   cc 

3    03 

o 

^ 

C3 

'ci 

o3    03 

•J3    03 

. 

03° 

c  ^ 

g 

g 

a  a 

"g  S 

CD 

» 

S  £ 

tj 

£  S  | 

CO 

| 

CO     CO 

03     CO 

o 

03 
0 

**  s'is 

1 

2 

2  2 

14 

A 

,__! 

s  ^  "T* 

T^ 

-a  ^3 

s 

-2 

o  ?^  ^ 

B 

fl      GJ 

c  a 

"?   C 

•-: 

•p;   7*  •  — 

0 

O  i—  i 

0    0 

.i    O 

tS 

o 

•  — 

o 

S    O    S 

0 

O    £-1 

0    0 

—  - 

CO 

^ 

d 

CO 

^i5 

ocd 

S^ 

P! 

B 

05 

_. 

.jl 

O 

j 

1 

i 

*^ 

-w 

1 

10 

CO 

03 

•  ^ 

.  ^ 

CO 

CM 

03 

CO 

^i 

r» 

.a 

•^ 

i—  1 

0} 

CO 

M 

•c 

•• 

jO 

,0 

^^ 

CO 

J8 

j§ 

'£ 

"Z 

'.B 

TH 

10 

^ 

•c 

GN 

CO 

•"* 

uri 

CO 

co 

T-5 

<N 

CO' 

-^ 

Vx^ 

CO 

t-^ 

oi 

C"l 

CO 

•^ 

lO 

CO 

(>« 

30 

m 

0 

co' 

-* 

0 

CO' 

**" 

<x> 

OJ 

1—  1 

"8 

S 

>>ci 

^ 

« 

o 

^ 

ce 

S 

03 

2 

H 

-2  o 

B 

03 

." 

• 

B 

1 

^ 

^ 

t-    03 

^3 

0 

Innominate  artery  and  veins.  Spine  of  scapi 
Beginning  of  superior  vena  cava. 

CO 

"o  '^ 

'3 

.  £ 
08  O 

•g  ^ 

»! 

-J  — 

§8 

o 

03 

1 

Bifurcation  of  trachea.  Arch  of  azygos  vein, 
of  arch  of  aorta. 

Right  and  left  bronchi.  Left  pulmonary  a 
Highest  part  of  roots  of  lungs.  Descending 

• 

Highest  part  of  heart.  Division  and  right  b 
of  pulmonary  artery. 

Ascending  aorta.  Pulmonary  artery.  Righ 
left  auricles.  Left  bronchus. 
End  of  superior  cava.  Pulmonary  orifice. 

Aortic  orifice.  Infundibulum  of  right  ven 
Both  auricles. 
Left  ventricle.  Lowest  part  of  roots  of  lung: 

Lower  angle  of  scapula.  Four  cavities  of  ] 
Both  auriculo-ventricular  apertures. 

Right  vault  of  diaphragm.  Orifice  of  inferior 
Right  auriculo-ventricular  aperture. 

Liver. 
Left  vault  of  diaphragm  and  fundus  of  stoma 

Lowest  part  of  heart.  Central  leaflet  of 
phragmatic  tendon. 

Cardiac  orifice  of  stomach. 

Upper  limit  of  spleen. 

£ 

, 

S 

•rf 

13 

"oj 

13 

TJ 

^ 

13 

i-H 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

c 

0 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

•q 

13 

2 

\a 

CO 

. 

| 

06 

oi 

O 
I—  1 

I-H 
I—  1 

1 

CO 

E 

0 

oo 

0 

h 

O 

0 

E 

0 

OQ 

O 

z 

0 

00 

E 

0 

•a 

"0 

-o 

•« 

-a 

-d 

-a 

CO 

* 

10 

cc> 

^ 

CO 

0) 

d 

rH 

Wc^ 
g 

H   •£ 


MH 


aj 

1 

.s 

jj 

| 

I 

o 

s 

t. 

1 

o 

I 

I 

1 

— 
s 

00 

i 

1 

a 

a 

P 

1- 

c 

6 

'Co 

t  ; 

0,0 

-IJ 

06 

5 

"•jj 

OS 

j^ 

o 

o 

*f 

^ 

• 

06 

"5 

j^ 

•^  ? 

m 

•fi 

* 

eg 
9 

1 

»3  o 

w  <]} 

•fi 

t* 

•c 

OS 

O 

. 

oo 

oo 

In 

3 

.22 

. 

• 

oi 

JO 

CO 

ti  E 

oo 

(        • 

M 

O5 

0 

0 

rH 

05 

•c 

-«  e 

O 

1-H 

rH 
rH 

O 

rH 

rH 
rH 

r^  o> 

,_; 

oi 

(N 

rH 

0 

rH 

ia  * 

i—  i 

rH 

rH 

*"* 

O            •rH 

X 

a      a  ^ 

>,0 

a 

1 

&o     s  ^ 

§"1 

a  <p 

-s 

OJ 

i 

g      "S 
£     co 

O 

r§ 

O        o1-^ 

II 

2 

o 

05 

'S 

3 

"fi 

^^ 

£ 

s 

P< 

0 

O            rj 

ttj       a 

V-c 

a      ®  S 

K 

J3    O 

C3 

.2 

rn          r< 

O 

S        o>  'C 

o 

1 
1 

p 

m 

1 
1 

Lower  margin  of  lung  posteriorly. 
Upper  end  of  left  kidney.  Suprarenal 

.  Upper  end  of  right  kidney. 

Lower  boundary  of  pleura  behind. 
Winslow. 
Pyloric  orifice  and  first  part  of  duodem 
flexure  of  colon. 

Beginning  of  abdominal  aorta,and  origin 

;  Pyloric  orifice  and  first  part  of  duoden 
of  superior  mesenteric  artery. 
Hepatic  flexure  of  colon.  Pancreas.  E 
chyli.  Hila  of  kidneys.  Renal  arte: 
end  of  spleen. 

End  of  spinal  cord. 

Is 

o 

a 

1 

Q 
o 

i 

o 

w 

Lower  end  of  left  kidney. 

Lowest  part  of  liver.  Lower  end  of  r 
Third  part  of  duodenum.  Origin 
mesenteric  artery.  Infracostal  plan 

Bifurcation  of  aorta.  Highest  part  of 

Beginning  of  inferior  vena  cava.  Bi-i] 

Bifurcation  of  common  iliac  artery. 

L 

A 

cS 

3 

"5 

x 

j2 

JO 

K 

"o  > 

a 

9 

Is 

1 

'« 

Jsi 

•"" 

>—  ' 

E 

• 

§b 

tf~ 

03 

10 

C3 
OS 

. 

o1 

11 

0, 

a 

Is 

^ 

"* 

o 

i 

3 

CO 

<N 

^ 

(N 

»|j 

™ 
O 

i 

i 

a 

.0 

3 

| 

i 

£.3 

•d 

•a 

s 

ps 

P 

£3 

2 

o£ 

1—1 

*^ 

rH 

rH 

rH 

' 

r-J 

iH 

T-J 

0) 

00 

« 

10 

SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OP   THE   UPPER    LIMB.  35 

SUPERFICIAL     ANATOMY     OF     THE     UPPER     LIMB. 

THE     SHOULDER. 

In  the  region  of  the  shoulder,  the  outer  part  of  the  clavicle  and  the  acromion 
process  of  the  scapula  can  be  distinctly  felt  beneath  the  skin,  and  the  extremity  of 
the  former  bone  usually  gives  rise  to  a  marked  elevation  at  its  junction  with  the 
acromion.  The  rounded  prominence  of  the  shoulder  is  formed  immediately  by  the 
thick  deltoid  muscle,  but  it  is  also  due  in  great  measure  to  the  large  upper  extremity 
of  the  humerus,  which  can  be  felt  moving  under  the  muscle  as  the  arm  is  rotated. 
Close  to  the  inner  side  of  the  shoulder-joint,  and  just  below  the  clavicle,  the  coracoid 
process  is  to  be  recognized  in  the  infraclavicular  fossa  (see  below)  ;  and  by  pressing 
deeply  in  the  axilla,  when  the  arm  is  abducted,  the  lower  margin  of  the  glenoid 
cavity  and  the  head  of  the  humerus  are  also  to  be  felt. 

The  adjacent  margins  of  the  deltoid  and  pectoralis  major  are  closely  united 
together  at  their  lower  parts,  so  that  the  division  between  the  two  muscles  is  not 
indicated  on  the  surface  ;  but  superiorly,  they  are  separated  by  a  triangular  interval 
of  variable  breadth,  which  gives  rise  to  the  well-marked  infraclavicular  fossa.  By 
pressing  deeply  in  this  fossa,  the  axillary  artery  may  be  compressed  against  the 
second  rib.  The  back  of  the  shoulder  is  flattened,  and  sloped  from  within  outwards 
and  a  little  forwards,  owing  to  the  oblique  position  of  the  scapula  ;  and  the  hinder- 
portion  of  the  deltoid,  which  is  thinner  than  the  anterior,  is  tendinous  at  its  origin, 
and  adheres  closely  to  the  subjacent  infraspinatus  muscle,  so  that  the  upper  part  of 
its  margin  is  not  indicated  upon  the  surface.  The  infraspinatus  is  continued  into 
the  teres  minor,  and  below  the  latter  muscle  is  the  thick  teres  major,  with  the 
latissimus  dorsi  winding  round  it,  forming  the  posterior  fold  of  the  axilla.  When 
the  arm  is  abducted,  the  middle  portion  of  the  deltoid,  being  brought  into  action,  is 
seen  to  present  an  irregular  surface,  the  prominences  corresponding  to  the  separate 
fleshy  portions  of  the  muscle,  and  the  depressions  to  the  tendinous  septa  extending 
downwards  from  the  acromion. 

The  course  of  the  axillary  artery  is  marked  upon  the  surface  by  a  line  drawn 
from  the  mid-point  of  the  clavicle  to  the  inner  border  of  the  elevation  formed  by 
the  coraco-brachialis  muscle  (see  below).  If  the  limb  be  raised  from  the  side,  the 
third  part  of  the  artery  may  be  felt  pulsating  beneath  the  integument  and  fascia 
(the  vein  intervening)  as  it  passes  into  the  arm,  being  placed  at  the  junction  of  the 
anterior  and  middle  thirds  of  the  space  between  the  axillary  folds.  The  artery  may 
be  readily  compressed  here  against  the  humerus.  The  posterior  circumflex  vessels 
and  the  circumflex  nerve  are  winding  round  the  back  of  the  humerus  under  cover  of 
the  deltoid,  at  the  junction  of  the  upper  and  the  middle  thirds  of  the  muscle. 

THE     ABM. 

The  shaft  of  the  humerus  is  for  the  most  part  thickly  covered  by  the  muscles  of 
the  arm,  and  can  only  be  felt  with  difficulty  ;  but  just  below  the  insertion  of  the 
deltoid  the  bone  comes  nearer  to  the  surface,  and  from  this  spot  the  outer  border,  or 
the  external  supracondylar  ridge,  can  be  followed  down  to  the  outer  condyle,  along 
the  bottom  of  a  furrow  over  the  external  intermuscular  septum,  between  the 
supinator  longus  and  triceps  muscles.  The  internal  supracondylar  ridge  is  less 
prominent,  and  not  so  readily  felt. 

Along  the  fore  and  inner  part  of  the  arm  (when  hanging  naturally  by  the  side) 
is  the  eminence  formed  by  the  biceps  muscle,  extending,  with  a  slight  inclination 
outwards  below,  from  the  anterior  margin  of  the  axilla  to  the  elbow.  Superiorly, 
this  is  continued  into  a  narrow  elevation  produced  by  the  coraco-brachialis  muscle, 
which  issues  from  between  the  anterior  and  posterior  axillary  folds.  Two 
depressions,  the  inner  and  outer  licipital  furrows,  are  found  on  the  inner  and  outer 

D    2 


36 


SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE    UPPER    LIMB. 


side  respectively  of  the  prominence  of  the  biceps  ;  along  the  outer  of  these  the 
cephalic  vein  may  generally  be  seen  ascending  beneath  the  skin  ;  in  the  inner, 
which  is  better  marked,  are  placed  the  basilic  vein  (in  its  lower  half  or  less  super- 
ficial to  the  fascia),  the  brachial  vessels  and  the  median  nerve.  The  brachial  artery 


Fig.  16. — SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY  OF   THE    UPPER   LIMB  :   ANTERIOR  VIEW. 
G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     (R.  J.  G.  &  G.  D.  T.) 


(From    a   photograph    by 


is  usually  overlapped  to  some  extent  by  the  margin  of  the  biceps,  but  it  can  be  felt 
pulsating  throughout.  Pressure  should  be  applied  to  the  vessel  from  within 
outwards  in  the  upper  half  of  the  arm,  from  before  backwards  in  the  lower. 

On  the  outer  side  of  the  biceps,  a  portion  of  the  brachialis  anticus  conies  to  the 
surface,  and  beyond  that  the  supinator  longus  and  extensor  carpi  radialis  longior 
form  a  prominence  which  descends  to  the  forearm  in  front  of  the  external  condyle  ; 


circumflex 

/  nefue.  and  vessels 


Fig.  17. — SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY   OF    THE  UPPER  LIMB  :   POSTERIOR   VIEW. 
G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     (R.  J.  G.  &  G.  D.  T.) 


(From   a   photograph   by 


the  supinator  muscle  shows  very  plainly  if  the  elbow  be  forcibly  flexed  with  the 
hand  in  a  state  of  semipronation.  On  the  inner  side  of  the  biceps,  in  the  lower 
part  of  the  arm,  a  smaller  portion  of  the  brachialis  anticus  is  superficial,  and  between 
this  and  the  triceps,  the  internal  intermuscular  septum  can  be  felt,  with  the  ulnar 
nerve  close  behind  it,  descending  to  the  internal  condyle. 


THE   ARM    AND   ELBOW.  37 

The  form  of  the  back  of  the  arm  is  determined  by  the  triceps  muscle,  the  three 
iieads  of  which,  together  with  the  large  tendon  of  insertion,  are  to  be  recognized 
when  the  muscle  is  called  into  play.  The  inner  head  is  the  least  distinct  ;  the 
outer  head  forms  a  large  prominence  immediately  below  the  hinder  border  of  the 
deltoid  ;  the  long  head  can  be  seen  issuing  from  between  the  teres  major  and  minor 
muscles,  and  descending  along  the  middle  of  the  back  of  the  arm  ;  while  the  tendon 
is  represented  by  a  depressed  area,  leading  down  to  the  olecranon  process  of  the 
ulna.  The  musculo-spiral  nerve  begins  to  incline  backwards  immediately  below  the 
posterior  fold  of  the  axilla,  and  crosses  the  back  of  the  humerus  obliquely  from 
within  outwards  in  its  middle  third,  being  covered  by  the  long  and  outer  heads  of 
the  triceps  muscle,  and  accompanied  by. the  superior  profunda  vessels.  At,  or  a 
little  above,  the  junction  of  the  middle  and  lower  thirds  of  the  arm,  the  nerve 
perforates  the  external  intermuscular  septum,  and  it  then  descends  in  front  of  the 
outer  supracondylar  ridge,  and  under  cover  of  the  supinator  longus  muscle,  to  the 
level  of  the  external  condyle,  where  it  divides  into  the  radial  and  posterior  interos- 
seous  nerves.  The  former  takes  a  straight  course  downwards  to  join  the  artery  of 
the  same  name  below  the  elbow  ;  but  the  posterior  interosseous  is  directed  back- 
wards across  the  outer  side  of  the  radius  in  its  upper  fourth,  to  gain  the  back  of 
the  forearm. 

THE    ELBOW. 

At  the  elbow,  the  internal  and  external  condyles  come  to  the  surface,  and  also 
the  olecranon  process  of  the  ulna.  The  internal  condyle,  which,  it  will  be 
remembered,  is  directed  more  backwards  than  inwards,  is  very  prominent,  and  forms 
one  of  the  most  important  bony  landmarks  of  the  limb.  The  external  condyle, 
together  with  the  common  tendon  of  the  extensor  muscles  of  the  forearm,  gives  rise, 
when  the  joint  is  extended,  to  a  well-marked  depression  at  the  outer  and  back  part 
of  the  elbow,  between  the  supinator  longus  and  extensor  carpi  radial  is  longior 
muscles  externally,  and  the  anconeus  internally.  In  this  hollow,  when  the  muscles 
are  relaxed,  the  head  of  the  radius  may  be  felt  below  the  external  condyle  and  the 
capitellum.  If  the  elbow  be  semi-flexed,  the  condyle  is  slightly  prominent ;  and  in 
extreme  flexion,  the  outer  part  of  the  triceps  muscle  is  stretched  over  the  capitellum 
of  the  humerus,  which  forms  a  rounded  eminence  to  the  outer  side  of  the  point  of 
the  elbow  (olecranon),  while  the  condyle  itself  is  no  longer  visible.  The  olecranon 
is  subcutaneous  at  its  posterior  surface,  its  upper  end  being  entirely  covered  by  the 
insertion  of  the  triceps  ;  its  appearance  necessarily  varies  with  the  position  of  the 
joint,  as  does  also  the  distance  between  the  process  and  the  shoulder.  A  bursa  is 
interposed  between  the  bone  and  the  skin. 

At  the  bend  of  the  elbow,  the  subcutaneous  veins  are  more  or  less  distinctly 
visible,  according  to  the  quantity  of  subcutaneous  fat  : — the  median  vein  bifurcat- 
ing into  the  median-basilic  and  median-cephalic,  which  join  respectively  the 
ulnar  and  radial  veins  to  form  the  basilic  and  cephalic.  The  median-basilic  and 
median-cephalic  veins,  diverging  from  each  other,  pass  upwards  on  either  side  of 
the  biceps  tendon,  which  is  seen,  when  the  elbow  is  bent,  descending  from  the  lower 
end  of  the  muscular  belly  into  the  interval  between  the  two  masses  of  forearm 
muscles.  The  sharp  upper  edge  of  the  bicipital  fascia  may  also  be  felt,  and,  when 
the  muscle  is  forcibly  contracted,  seen,  as  it  passes  downwards  and  inwards  between 
the  median-basilic  vein  and  the  lower  part  of  the  brachial  artery.  The  pulsation  of 
the  latter  vessel  may  be  felt,  and  often  seen,  as  it  passes  obliquely  downwards  and 
outwards  to  a  point  a  little  below  the  middle  of  the  bend  of  the  elbow. 


38  SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE    UPPER    LIMB. 


THE     FOREARM. 

From  the  olecranon,  the  sinuous  posterior  border  of  the  ulna  is  to  be  followed 
down  the  forearm,  corresponding  to  a  superficial  furrow  between  the  ulnar  flexor 
and  extensor  muscles  of  the  wrist ;  the  border  becomes  rounded  off  in  the  lower 
third,  but  a  narrow  strip  of  the  bone  is  still  subcutaneous,  leading  down  to  the 
styloid  process.  When  the  hand  is  supinated,  the  styloid  process  of  the  ulna  is 
exposed  at  the  inner  and  posterior  pjfrt  of  the  wrist ;,  but  if  the  hand  be  pronated, 
then  the  skin  is  stretched  over  the  opposite  (outer)  part  of  the  head  of  the  ulna, 
which  projects  between  the  extensor  carpi  ulnaris  and  extensor  minimi  digiti 
muscles.  Close  below  the  outer  condyle  of  the  humerus  the  head  of  the  radius  may 
be  felt  moving  beneath  the  muscles,  more  distinctly  when  the  elbow  is  bent,  as  the 
forearm  is  alternately  pronated  and  supinated.  The  upper  half  of  the  shaft  of  the 
radius  is  too  thickly  covered  by  muscles  to  be  distinctly  made  out  ;  the  lower  half 
is  nearer  to  the  surface,  and  can  be  readily  examined  between  and  through  the 
surrounding  muscles  and  tendons  ;  at  the  lower  end,  the  styloid  process,  which 
descends  rather  lower  than  the  styloid  process  of  the  ulna,  is  superficial  in  front  and 
behind,  being  covered  externally  by  the  tendons  of  the  extensor  ossis  metacarpi  and 
extensor  brevis  (ext.  primi  internodii)  pollicis  muscles  ;  and  the  prominent  tubercle 
on  the  outer  side  of  the  groove  for  the  extensor  longus  pollicis  (ext.  secundi  inter- 
nodii) is  also  to  be  distinguished. 

Along  the  inner  and  fore  part  of  the  forearm  is  the  prominence  formed  by  the 
pronato-flexor  muscles,  the  great  mass  covering  the  ulna  internally  being  formed  by 
the  flexor  profundus  digitorum  beneath  the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris.  A  short  distance 
below  the  internal  condyle,  a  slight  groove  runs  obliquely  downwards  and  inwards 
across  the  muscles,  caused  by  the  prolongation  of  the  fibres  of  the  bicipital  fascia. 
Near  the  wrist,  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris  can  be  felt,  passing  down  to 
the  pisiform  bone,  and  immediately  external  to  the  tendon  the  beating  of  the  ulnar 
artery  is  perceptible  :  when  the  wrist  is  extended  a  groove  marks  the  position  of 
the  tendon.  About  the  centre  of  the  front  of  the  wrist  the  tendon  of  the  palmaris 
longus  descends,  being  the  moet  prominent  of  all  the  tendons  here,  and  a  little 
external  to  this,  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  carpi  radialis  is  also  visible.  It  will 
however  be  remembered  that  the  palmaris  longus  is  often  wanting.  Outside  the 
tendon  of  the  flexor  carpi  radialis  is  a  hollow  in  which  the  radial  vessels  are  placed, 
and  where  the  pulse  is  commonly  felt  :  immediately  internal  to  the  tendon  lies  the 
median  nerve. 

Along  the  outer  border  of  the  forearm,  the  long  supinator  and  radial  extensor 
muscles  of  the  wrist  descend,  becoming  tendinous  and  smaller  below  the  middle  ; 
and  in  the  lower  third  of  the  forearm  a  smaller  prominence,  directed  obliquely 
downwards,  outwards  and  forwards,  results  from  the  presence  of  the  extensor 
muscles  of  the  thumb  crossing  over  the  long  tendons.  On  the  back  of  the  forearm 
are  the  extensors  of  the  fingers,  the  extensor  carpi  ulnaris,  and  the  anconeus,  all  of 
which  may  be  individually  distinguished  in  thin  persons. 

Numerous  cutaneous  veins  are  seen  on  the  forearm,  arising  principally  from  the 
network  on  the  dorsum  of  the  hand,  and  forming  two  main  trunks,  the  posterior 
ulnar  and  the  radial,  which  ascend  respectively  along  the  inner  and  outer  borders 
of  the  limb,  and  incline  forwards  to  their  terminations  in  front  of  the  elbow  ;  in 
many  cases  another  large  vein  is  present  (assisting  or  even  replacing  the  radial 
vein),  which  turns  round  the  outer  border  of  the  forearm  below  the  middle  to  join 
the  median  vein.  The  subcutaneous  veins  of  the  lower  part  of  the  front  of  the 
forearm  (also  those  of  the  palm)  are  small,  and  terminate  in  the  median  and  anterior 
ulnar  veins.  It  occasionally  happens  that  the  ulnar  artery,  having  been  derived 
from  the  brachial  at  a  higher  level  than  usual,  descends  over  the  pronato-flexor 


THE   FOREARM    AND   HAND.  89 

muscles  to  the  wrist,  and  in  that  case  it  would  be  felt  pulsating  beneath  the  skin  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  the  anterior  ulnar  vein  (Vol.  II,  p.  445). 

The  bifurcation  of  the  brachial  artery  takes  place  opposite  a  spot  a  finger's 
breadth  below  the  centre  of  the  bend  of  the  elbow.  From  this  point,  the  radial 
artery  runs  downwards  with  a  nearly  straight  course  to  the  fore  part  of  the  styloid 
process  of  the  radius,  being  covered  by  the  supinator  longus  as  far  as  the  centre  of 
the  forearm,  and  superficial  beyond  this  spot.  The  ulnar  artery  inclines,  with  a 
slightly  curved  course,  inwards  to  the  middle  of  a  line  drawn  from  the  back  of  the 
internal  condyle  of  the  humerus  to  the  outer  side  of  the  pisiform  bone  :  this  line 
indicates  in  its  whole  extent  the  direction  of  the  ulnar  nerve  in  the  forearm,  in  its 
lower  half  that  of  the  ulnar  artery  also.  The  latter  is  deeply  placed  beneath  the 
muscles  arising  from  the  internal  condyle  till  within  an  inch  of  the  wrist. 

THE    WBIST    AND    HAND. 

At  the  front  of  the  wrist,  on  the  inner  side,  the  pisiform  bone  can  be  grasped 
between  the  fingers,  and  moved  slightly  from  side  to  side  ;  below  this,  and  a  little 
more  externally,  the  hook  of  the  unciform  bone  can  be  felt  with  difficulty.  On  the 
outer  side,  a  projection  is  felt  just  below  and  internal  to  the  styloid  process  of  the 
radius,  formed  by  the  tuberosity  of  the  scaphoid  bone,  and  close  below  this,  the  ridge 
of  the  trapezium  is  also  to  be  distinguished.  At  the  back  of  the  wrist,  on  the  inner 
side,  the  pyramidal  bone  can  be  felt,  and  slightly  external  to  the  middle  line  of  the 
hand  is  a  prominence,  sometimes  indistinct,  but  often  very  well  marked,  formed  by 
the  styloid  process  on  the  base  of  the  third  metacarpal  bone  at  its  articulation  with 
the  os  magnum. 

At  the  metacarpo-phalangeal  articulation  of  the  thumb  the  sesamoid  bones  can 
be  felt  ;  and  on  the  dorsal  aspect  of  the  hand  the  metacarpal  bones  and  the 
phalanges  can  be  distinctly  followed. 

At  the  outer  side  of  the  wrist,  when  the  thumb  is  extended,  there  is  a  deep 
hollow  bounded  by  the  prominent  tendons  of  the  extensor  ossis  metacarpi  and 
extensor  brevis  pollicis  anteriorly  and  the  extensor  longus  pollicis  posteriorly  ;  the 
latter  tendon  may  be  followed  down  over  the  metacarpal  bone  and  first  phalanx  of 
the  thumb  almost  to  its  insertion.  Beneath  these  tendons,  and  across  the  inter- 
vening hollow,  the  radial  artery  runs  in  its  course  from  the  front  to  the  back  of  the 
wrist  ;  its  direction  may  be  marked  by  a  line  drawn  from  the  fore  part  of  the 
styloid  process  of  the  radius  to  the  upper  end  of  the  first  interosseous  space  ;  and 
a  considerable  vein,  ascending  from  the  outer  part  of  the  hand,  is  usually  to  be  seen 
through  the  skin  over  the  position  of  the  artery. 

On  the  back  of  the  hand,  the  tendons  of  the  extensor  communis  digitorum  and 
extensor  minimi  digiti  may  all  be  recognized,  together  with  the  connecting  band 
between  the  innermost  slip  of  the  common  extensor  and  the  outer  portion  of  the 
little  finger  tendon.  In  some  cases  the  tendon  of  the  extensor  indicis  may  also  be 
perceived  on  the  inner  side  of  the  first  slip  of  the  extensor  communis.  Between  the 
first  and  second  metacarpal  bones  is  the  abductor  indicis  muscle,  which  forms  a 
well-marked  prominence  when  the  thumb  is  brought  to  the  side  of  the  index  finger, 
and  below  this  is  the  adductor  transversus  pollicis  muscle  contained  in  the  fold  of 
skin  passing  across  between  the  thumb  and  the  outer  margin  of  the  palm. 

The  palm  of  the  hand  is  concave  in  the  centre,  where  the  skin  is  tightly  adherent 
to  the  palmar  fascia,  and  raised  on  each  side.  The  outer  elevation  (thenar)  is 
formed  by  the  outer  group  of  the  short  muscles  of  the  thumb  ;  the  inner  (hypothenar) 
by  the  short  muscles  of  the  little  finger.  From  the  central  hollow  of  the  palm  a 
slight  groove  is  continued  downwards  to  each  of  the  fingers,  corresponding  to  the 
prolongations  of  the  palmar  fascia.  The  palm  is  traversed  generally  by  four  more  or 


40 


SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF   THE    UPPER    LIMB. 


less  regular  lines,  representing  the  folds  or  "  flexures  "  produced  in  the  skin  by  the 
movements  of  the  principal  joints  of  the  hand.  Two  of  these  lines  are  directed 
nearly  transversely,  the  others  longitudinally.  Of  the  transverse  lines,  one 
commences  about  the  junction  of  the  upper  three-fourths  with  the  lower  fourth  of 
the  inner  border  of  the  palm,  and  runs  outwards  and  then  downwards  to  the  cleft 
between  the  index  and  middle  fingers  ;  this  is  caused  by  bending  the  metacarpo- 
phalangeal  articulations  of  the  inner  three  fingers  ;  the  second  starts  nearly  opposite 
the  foregoing,  at  the  outer  border  of  the  hand,  and  is  directed  inwards  and  sorne- 


SUPtRFICIAL 
ARCH 


Fig.  18. — PALMAR  SURFACE  OF  THK  HAND,  SHOWING    THE  CUTANEOUS    LINES  AND   THE    SITUATION    OF 

THE    CHIEF    ARTERIES    IN    RELATION    TO    THE    SKELETON.       (G.   D.   T. ) 

what  upwards  across  the  middle  of  the  palm  ;  this  results  mainly  from  the  flexion  of 
the  first  joint  of  the  index  finger.  The  metacarpo-phalaugeal  articulations  are 
placed  about  midway  between  these  lines  and  the  web  of  the  fingers.  Of  the 
longitudinal  lines,  one,  beginning  near  the  centre  of  the  wrist,  curves  outwards  to 
join  the  upper  transverse  line,  and  is  produced  by  the  opposition  of  the  thumb  ;  the 
other  runs  downwards  from  the  wrist  through  the  centre  of  the  palm  to  meet  the 
lower  transverse  line  opposite  the  middle  finger,  and  is  caused  by  the  opposition  of 
the  fifth  metacarpal  bone.  The  four  lines  give  rise  to  a  figure  resembling  the 
letter  M.  At  the  wrist,  two  or  three  lines,  directed  rather  obliquely,  outwards  and 
a  little  downwards,  indicate  the  position  of  the  principal  folds  formed  during  flexion 


THE    HAND.  41 

of  the  joint ;  the  radio-carpal  articulation  is  placed  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch 
above  the  lowest  of  these  lines.  There  are  three  well-marked  transverse  grooves  on 
each  finger  ;  the  lower  and  middle  ones  are  nearly  opposite  the  two  interphalangeal 
joints  ;  the  upper  one,  which  is  produced,  as  well  as  the  transverse  lines  of  the  palm, 
by  bending  the  metacarpo-phalangeal  articulations,  is  placed  nearly  three-quarters  of 
an  inch  (15  mm.)  below  the  joint,  and  on  a  level  with  the  web  of  the  fingers.  On  the 
thumb,  there  are  only  two  grooves,  and  the  proximal,  which  is  less  distinct  than  the 
other,  continues  upwards  the  line  of  the  radial  border  of  the  index  finger,  thus 
crossing  obliquely  the  corresponding  articulation. 

The  web  of  the  fingers,  containing  the  superficial  transverse  ligament,  limits  the 
interdigital  clefts  on  the  palmar  side  ;  on  the  dorsum  of  the  hand  the  clefts  are 
continued  upwards  almost  to  the  metacarpo-phalangeal  joints. 

The  superficial  palmar  arch  is  placed  beneath  the  palmar  fascia  about  the  centre 
of  the  palm  ;  its  position  may  be  indicated  by  a  line  carried  from  the  outer 
side  of  the  pisiform  bone  downwards,  and  then  curving  outwards  across  the 
middle  third  of  the  palm  on  a  level  with  the  upper  end  of  the  cleft  between  the 
thumb  and  index  finger.  From  the  convex  side  of  the  arch  digital  branches 
proceed,  one  to  the  ulnar  margin  of  the  little  finger,  and  three  which  descend 
opposite  the  intervals  between  the  fingers  and  bifurcate  about  half  an  inch  above 
the  clefts.  The  deep  palmar  arch  rests  against  the  metacarpal  bones  about  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  nearer  the  wrist  than  the  superficial  arch,  and  the  digital  branches  given 
off  by  the  radial  artery  to  the  thumb  and  index  finger  are  deeply  placed  in  the 
palm,  the  collateral  arteries  of  the  thumb  becoming  superficial  at  the  base  of  the 
first  phalanx,  that  of  the  index  finger  issuing  from  behind  the  adductor  transversus 
pollicis.  The  latter  branch  is  not  unfrequently  derived  from  the  radial  artery  at 
the  back  of  the  wrist,  and  may  then  be  felt  pulsating  as  it  descends  on  the  posterior 
surface  of  the  abductor  indicis  muscle  to  its  destination.  The  superficial  volar 
artery  is  occasionally  visible  as  it  descends  over  the  upper  part  of  the  thenar  to 
the  palm. 


SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    LOWER    LIMB. 


SUPERFICIAL     ANATOMY     OF     THE     LOWER     LIMB. 

THE     HIP. 

The  region  of  the  hip,  gluteal  region  or  buttock,  extends  from  the  subcutaneous 
iliac  crest  and  the  origin  of  the  glutens  maximus  muscle  above  to  the  fold  of  the 
nates  below.  The  surface  is  formed  posteriorly  by  the  gluteus  maximus,  which  is 
generally  covered  by  a  considerable  quantity  of  fat,  and  laterally  by  the  glutens 
medius,  together  with,  at  the  foremost  part,  the  tensor  vaginas  femoris.  The  latter 
muscle  may  be  recognized  forming  a  distinct  prominence  below  the  anterior  part  of 
the  iliac  crest  (fig.  20),  especially  if  the  thigh  be  abducted  or  rotated  inwards. 
The  fold  of  the  nates  is  formed  during  extension  of  the  hip  by  the  drawing  in  of  the 
skin  below  the  level  of  the  ischial  tuberosity,  and  is  directed  horizontally  outwards, 
crossing  the  oblique  lower  border  of  the  gluteus  maximus  about  its  middle. 

The  iliac  crest  is  represented  on  the  surface,  in  muscular  subjects,  by  a  groove 
(iliac,  furrotv),  in  consequence  of  the  projection  of  the  external  oblique  muscle 


Fig.  19. — POSTERIOR  VIEW  OF  THK  HIP,  SHOWING  THK  SITUATION  OF  THE  BONES  AND  CHIEF  ARTERIES,  &c. 

•(B.  J.  G.  &GK  D.  T.) 

above,  and,  to  a  less  extent,  of  the  gluteus  medius  below.  Traced  forwards,  this 
furrow  terminates  at  the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine,  which  is  always  easily 
recognized  ;  posteriorly,  the  furrow  becomes  less  marked  as  the  crest  passes  below 
the  tendinous  portion  of  the  erector  spinte,  but  a  slight  depression  always  indicates 
the  position  of  the  posterior  superior  spine.  The  latter  point  is  on  a  level  with  the 
spinous  process  of  the  second  sacral  vertebra,  and  immediately  behind  the  centre  of 
the  sacro-iliac  articulation.  From  three  to  four  inches  (8 — 10  cm.)  below  the  iliac 
crest,  and  somewhat  in  front  of  its  central  point,  the  great  trochanter  is  to  be  felt, 
and  in  thin  persons  seen.  The  trochanter  projects  outwards  farther  than  the  iliac 
crest,  but  it  does  not  usually  appear  as  a  prominence  on  the  surface  owing  to  the 
great  thickness  of  the  gluteus  medius  and  minimus  muscles,  which  occupy  the  hollow 
between  it  and  the  ilium.  It  is  entirely  covered  by  the  aponeurotic  insertion  of  the 


THE    HIP    AND    THIGH.  43 

upper  part  of  the  glutens  raaximus,  and  its  upper  border,  which  is  generally  on  a 
level  with  the  centre  of  the  hip-joint,  is  obscured  by  the  tendon  of  the  gluteus 
medius  descending  to  its  insertion  on  the  outer  side  of  the  process.  Immediately 
behind  the  great  trochanter  is  a  well-marked  depression,  where  the  lower  portion  of 
the  gluteus  maximus,  after  passing  over  the  ischial  tuberosity,  becomes  tendinous 
and  sinks  in  to  be  inserted  into  the  shaft  of  the  femur. 

Beneath  the  lower  border  of  the  gluteus  maximus,  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium 
is  to  be  felt,  and  when  the  hip  is  flexed  this  process  is  to  a  great  extent  uncovered 
by  the  muscle.  A  line  drawn  over  the  outer  surface  of  the  hip  from  the  anterior 
superior  iliac  spine  to  the  most  prominent  part  of  the  ischial  tuberosity  is  known  as 
Nelatm's  line  (fig.  20),  and  will  be  found  to  pass  over  the  top  of  the  great  trochanter 
and  cross  the  centre  of  the  acetabulum.  It  thus  forms  a  guide  to  the  natural 
position  of  the  upper  end  of  the  femur,  and  is  consequently  of  service  in  detecting- 
dislocations  of  the  hip  and  fracture  of  the  neck  of  the  bone. 

If  a  line  be  drawn  from  the  posterior  superior  iliac  spine  to  the  outer  part  of  the 
ischial  tuberosity,  it  will  cross  the  posterior  inferior  spine  and  the  ischial  spine  :  the 
posterior  inferior  spine  is  nearly  two  inches  (4  cm.),  and  the  ischial  spine  about  four 
inches  (10  cm.),  below  the  posterior  superior  spine :  the  sciatic  artery  appears  in  the 
buttock  at  the  junction  of  the  middle  and  lower  thirds  of  this  line.  The  gluteal 
artery  leaves  the  great  sacro-sciatic  foramen  beneath  a  spot  corresponding  to  the 
junction  of  the  inner  and  middle  thirds  of  a  line  drawn  from  the  posterior  superior 
iliac  spine  to  the  great  trochanter,  when  the  thigh  is  rotated  inwards.  Between 
the  gluteal  and  sciatic  arteries,  the  great  sciatic  nerve  leaves  the  pelvis,  and  it 
thence  pursues  a  slightly  curved  course  to  a  point  midway  between  the  great 
trochanter  and  the  ischial  tuberosity. 

THE     THIGH. 

The  thigh  is  separated  from  the  abdomen  in  front  by  the  curved  inguinal  furrotv , 
at  the  bottom  of  which  Poupart's  ligament  may  be  felt  (except  in  fat  people),  more 
plainly  in  its  inner  than  in  its  outer  half,  as  it  passes  from  the  anterior  superior 
spine  of  the  ilium  to  the  pubic  spine  :  the  band  is  relaxed,  and  becomes  less  distinct, 
on  flexing  and  adducting,  or  rotating  inwards,  the  thigh.  From  the  pubic  spine, 
the  finger  may  be  carried  inwards  along  the  pubic  crest  to  the  top  of  the  symphysis, 
in  the  male  passing  over  the  spermatic  cord,  or  downwards  and  backwards  along  the 
inner  margin  of  the  united  pubic  and  ischial  rami  to  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium, 
thus  tracing  the  boundary  line  between  the  thigh  and  the  perineum.  Externally, 
the  thigh  is  not  definitely  marked  off  from  the  region  of  the  hip. 

Immediately  below  Poupart's  ligament,  a  slight  hollow  is  generally  seen, 
corresponding  to  Scarpa's  triangular  space  (Vol.  II,  pp.  252  and  487),  in  which, 
just  internal  to  the  centre,  the  femoral  artery  may  be  felt  pulsating.  Close  below 
the  innermost  part  of  Poupart's  ligament  is  situated  the  saphenous  opening  in  the 
fascia  lata,  the  upper  end  of  which  is  about  one  inch  outside  the  pubic  spine. 
Through  the  lower  part  of  this  aperture,  and  about  one  inch  and  a  half  below 
Poupart's  ligament,  the  internal  saphenous  vein  passes  back  to  join  the  femoral 
trunk,  and  above  the  vein  is  the  spot  where  a  femoral  hernia  first  makes  its 
appearance  on  the  surface  of  the  thigh.  Over  the  opening,  and  for  a  short  distance 
below  it,  the  femoral  or  lower  inguinal  lymphatic  glands  may  usually  be  felt  through 
the  skin,  surrounding  the  upper  end  of  the  internal  saphenous  vein. 

From  the  apex  of  Scarpa's  triangle  a  depression  is  continued  downwards  along 
the  inner  part  of  the  thigh,  between  the  masses  formed  by  the  quadriceps  extensor 
muscle  in  front,  and  the  adductor  muscles  on  the  inner  side.  The  sartorius  muscle 
lies  along  this  depression,  and  may  be  distinctly  seen  when  it  is  brought  into  action 
by  raising  the  leg  across  the  opposite  knee.  The  form  of  the  rectus  muscle  may  be 


44 


SUPERFICIAL   ANATOMY    OF   THE    LOWER    LIMB. 


distinguished  along  the  front  of  the  anterior  mass,  and  to  its  inner  side,  in  about 
the  lower  half  of  the  thigh,  the  vastus  internus  gives  rise  to  a  large  prominence, 


\l.\Me.  ft 


gktfcas 
•tn&iins 


furrow 


foe  pod.  __.. 

of  fteel,"' 


Fig.  20. — SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY   OP   THE   LOWER   LIMB  :    EXTERNAL  VIEW.     (From   a  photograph   by 
G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     (R.  J.  G.  &  G.  D.  T.) 

Fig.  21. — SUPERFICIAL  ANATOMY  OF  THE  LOWER  LIMB  :  ANTERO-INTERNAL  VIEW.     (From  a  photograph  by 
G.  W.  B.  Waters.)     (R,  J.  G.  &  G.  D.  T.) 

increasing  in  size  towards  the  knee,  while  on  the  outer  side  of  the  rectus,  the  vastus 
externus  forms  a  broad  convex  surface,  extending  from  the  great  trochanter  above 
almost  to  the  knee-joint  below,  and  being  continued  backwards  to  the  posterior 


THE   THIGH.  45 

aspect  of  the  limb.  The  surface  formed  by  the  vastus  externus  is  often  seen  to  be 
traversed  by  a  longitudinal  groove,  due  to  the  pressure  exerted  by  the  strong  ilio- 
tibial  band  of  the  fascia  lata  as  it  descends  from  the  insertions  of  the  gluteus 
maximus  and  tensor  vaginas  femoris  muscles  to  the  outer  tuberosity  of  the  tibia. 
Of  the  adductor  muscles,  the  only  parts  that  are  to  be  separately  recognized  are  the 
strong  tendon  of  origin  of  the  adductor  longus  below  the  pubic  crest,  and  the  lower 
tendon  of  the  adductor  magnus  which  is  felt  distinctly,  when  the  knee  is  bent,  in 
the  interval  between  the  sartorius  and  vastus  internus  muscles,  extending  down  to 
the  adductor  tubercle  on  the  internal  condyle  of  the  femur.  The  adductors  are  not 
marked  off  on  the  surface  from  the  hamstring  group  on  the  back  of  the  thigh,  nor 
are  the  latter  muscles  to  be  individually  distinguished  from  one  another  until  they 
become  tendinous  near  the  knee.  Along  the  outer  and  posterior  part  of  the  thigh, 
however,  the  hamstring  muscles  are  separated  from  the  vastus  externus  by  a  well 
marked  groove,  corresponding  to  the  position  of  the  external  inter  muscular 
septum. 

The  whole  of  the  shaft  of  the  femur  is  deeply  placed,  and  in  fairly  muscular 
subjects  is  not  to  be  detected  through  its  fleshy  covering.  It  approaches  the  surface 
most  nearly  in  the  lower  third  of  the  thigh  on  the  outer  side,  where  it  may  be 
readily  exposed  in  the  interval  between  the  vastus  externus  and  biceps  muscles. 
The  head  of  the  bone  is  situated  close  below  Poupart's  ligament,  immediately 
external  to  its  mid-point,  and  is  occasionally,  in  thin  subjects,  to  be  felt  in  this 
position  through  the  overlying  muscles. 

The  subcutaneous  veins  of  the  thigh  all  join  one  trunk,  the  internal  saphenous, 
which  ascends  from  the  hinder  part  of  the  inner  side  of  the  knee,  with  a  gradual 
inclination  forwards,  to  the  saphenous  opening.  The  extent  to  which  this  vein  and 
its  branches  are  to  be  perceived  varies  greatly  with  the  amount  of  subcutaneous 
fat. 

The  position  of  the  femoral  artery  is  indicated  by  a  line  drawn  from  a  point 
midway  between  the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine  and  the  pubic  symphysis  to  the 
prominent  tuberosity  on  the  inner  condyle  of  the  femur,  the  hip  having  been 
first  slightly  flexed  and  the  thigh  everted.  At  the  junction  of  the  upper  three- 
fourths  with  the  lower  fourth  of  this  line,  the  artery  passes  backwards  through  the 
opening  in  the  adductor  magnus  muscle.  Pressure  is  most  conveniently  applied  to 
the  vessel  as  it  enters  the  thigh  below  Poupart's  ligament,  and  it  should  be  directed 
backwards  so  as  to  compress  the  artery  against  the  pubis  and  the  adjacent  part  of 
the  hip-joint.  Lower  down,  the  pressure  must  be  made  in  a  direction  backwards 
and  outwards,  as  the  artery  lies  considerably  to  the  inner  side  of  the  shaft  of  the 
femur.  At  Poupart's  ligament,  the  femoral  vein  is  close  to  the  inner  side  of  the 
artery,  and  the  anterior  crural  nerve  is  a  little  distance  (a  quarter  to  half  an  inch) 
from  its  outer  side.  The  profnnda,  arising  from  the  main  trunk  usually  between 
one  and  two  inches  (3 — 5  cm.)  below  Poupart's  ligament,  follows  a  line  almost 
identical  with  that  of  the  femoral  artery. 

The  small  sciatic  (posterior  cutaneous)  nerve  lies  immediately  beneath  the  fascia 
along  the  middle  line  of  the  back  of  the  thigh  ;  and  in  the  same  line,  but  under 
cover  of  the  hamstring  muscles,  is  the  great  sciatic  nerve. 


THE     KNEE. 


On  the  inner  side  of  the  knee,  the  internal  condyle  of  the  femur  and  the 
corresponding  tuberosity  of  the  tibia  produce  a  rounded  surface,  the  most 
prominent  point  of  which  is  formed  by  the  tuberosity  on  the  internal  condyle.  The 
interval  between  the  two  bones  opposite  the  knee-joint  is  seldom  to  be  seen,  but  is 
always  easily  felt.  It  can  usually,  however,  be  readily  demonstrated  by  resting  the 


46  SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF   THE    LOWER    LIMB. 

lower  part  of  the  leg  on  the  opposite  knee,  when  the  inner  tuberosity  of  the  tibia 
projects  beyond  the  inner  condyle  of  the  femur.  On  the  upper  part  of  the  inner 
condyle,  the  sharp  adductor  tubercle  and  the  insertion  of  the  adductor  magnus 
tendon  are  also  to  be  recognized.  The  external  condyle,  although  not  generally 
prominent,  is  subcutaneous  and  readily  felt ;  its  tuberosity  is  comparatively  little 
developed.  The  outer  tuberosity  of  the  tibia,  on  the  other  hand,  forms  a  marked 
prominence  at  the  outer  and  fore  part  of  the  knee,  about  an  inch  below  the  joint ; 
and  behind  this,  at  a  slightly  lower  level,  viz.,  that  of  the  tubercle  of  the  tibia, 
the  head  of  the  fibula  is  distinctly  felt  at  the  outer  and  back  part  of  the  limb,  where 
it  generally  corresponds  to  a  depression,  when  the  joint  is  extended,  between  the 
tendon  of  the  biceps  above  and  the  peroneus  longus  muscle  below  :  it  often  forms 
a  prominence,  however,  when  the  knee  is  flexed.  Anteriorly,  the  patella  is  sub- 
cutaneous, and  its  lateral  margins  are  distinctly  seen.  When  the  extensor  muscles 
are  relaxed,  the  patella  can  be  easily  moved  from  side  to  side  ;  but  if  these  muscles 
are  contracted,  the  patella  is  drawn  upwards  and  pressed  firmly  against  the  end  of 
the  femur,  and  the  ligamentum  patellae  can  then  be  followed  down  to  the  tubercle  of 
the  tibia  :  on  each  side  of  the  ligament  is  a  soft  eminence  produced  by  the  infra- 
patellar  mass  of  fat.  When  the  knee  is  bent,  the  patella  sinks  into  the  hollow 
between  the  tibia  and  the  femur,  and  the  articular  surface  of  the  latter  bone  is  in 
great  part  exposed  ;  the  trochlear  surface  can  then  be  distinctly  traced,  although 
covered  by  the  tendon  of  the  extensor  muscle.  The  upper  and  outer  angle  of 
this  surface  forms  a  useful  landmark  ;  and  a  line  drawn  from  it  to  the  adductor 
tubercle  on  the  internal  coudyle  marks  the  upper  limit  of  the  epiphysis  of  the  lower 
end  of  the  femur.  There  are  generally  two  bursae,  a  superficial  one  and  a  deep 
one,  over  the  patella,  and  there  is  frequently  another  over  the  tubercle  of  the  tibia 
(Vol.  II,  p.  242). 

At  the  back  of  the  knee  is  the  ham,  which  is  marked  by  a  deep  hollow  when  the 
joint  is  flexed,  but  by  a  slight  elevation  when  it  is  extended.  On  each  side  are  the 
tendinous  hamstrings  ;  internally  the  slender  semitendinosus  and  the  stronger  semi- 
membranosus  are  to  be  recognized,  as  well  as  the  gracilis  a  little  farther  forwards  ; 
externally  is  the  thick  tendon  of  the  biceps  leading  down  to  the  head  of  the  fibula. 
Immediately  in  front  of  the  biceps  tendon,  when  the  joint  is  a  little  bent,  the  upper 
part  of  the  external  lateral  ligament  is  to  be  detected  ;  and  between  this  and  the 
outer  margin  of  the  patella,  the  lower  end  of  the  ilio-tibial  band  appears  as  a  strong 
cord  beneath  the  skin,  running  down  on  the  outer  side  of  the  knee  to  the  prominent 
external  tuberosity  of  the  tibia  ;  while  on  the  inner  side,  the  sartorius  tendon,  with 
the  subjacent  tendons  of  the  gracilis  and  semitendinosus,  forms  a  slight  elevation  as 
it  curves  forwards  below  the  inner  tuberosity,  to  be  inserted  close  to  the  tubercle  of 
the  tibia. 

The  external  saphenous  vein  enters  the  lower  part  of  the  ham  in  the  middle 
line  of  the  limb,  and  perforates  the  fascia  to  join  the  popliteal  vein  ;  but  it  is  not 
usually  visible  on  the  surface.  The  internal  saphenous  vein  is  generally  seen  on  the 
inner  side  of  the  knee,  and  the  nerve  of  the  same  name  meets  it  behind  the  internal 
tuberosity. 

The  popliteal  vessels  enter  the  ham  somewhat  internal  to  the  middle  line  above, 
and  are  then  continued  downwards  over  the  centre  of  the  back  of  the  knee  ;  the 
vein  is  more  superficial  than  the  artery,  but  both  are  very  deeply  placed.  The 
upper  articular  vessels  run  transversely  inwards  and  outwards  immediately  above  the 
condyles  of  the  femur  ;  and  the  lower  articular  vessels  are  respectively  just  below 
the  inner  tuberosity  of  the  tibia,  and  above  the  head  of  the  fibula.  The  deep  part 
of  the  anastomotic  artery  descends  to  the  knee  along  the  front  of  the  adductor 
magnus  tendon. 


THE    LEG.  47 

The  internal  popliteal  nerve,  continuing  the  direction  of  the  great  sciatic,  and 
descending  in  the  median  line  of  the  limb,  is  superficial  to  the  vessels.  The  external 
popliteal  nerve  is  at  first  under  cover  of  the  fleshy  belly  of  the  biceps,  and  then  lies 
on  the  outer  side  of  the  ham,  close  behind  the  tendon  of  that  muscle  ;  it 'may  be  felt 
rolling  beneath  the  finger  as  it  crosses  the  outer  side  of  the  neck  of  the  fibula, 
before  entering  the  peroneus  longus  muscle  ;  and  it  is  sometimes  to  be  seen  giving 
rise  to  a  slight  elevation  in  this  position. 

The  glands  in  the  popliteal  space  are  not  to  be  felt  unless  they  are  enlarged. 

THE     LEG- 

Along  the  fore  part  of  the  leg,  the  anterior  border  of  the  tibia  is  to  be  followed 
downwards  from  the  tubercle,  constituting  what  is  known  as  the  shin.  This 
border  is  sharp  in  the  upper  two-thirds  of  the  leg,  and  describes  a  slight  curve  with 
the  concavity  outwards  ;  in  the  lower  third  the  border  disappears,  and  the  bone  is 
concealed  by  the  tendons  of  the  anterior  muscles.  On  the  inner  side  of  the  shin, 
the  broad  internal  surface  of  the  tibia  is  subcutaneous  below  the  sartorius,  and  leads 
downwards  to  the  prominent  internal  malleolus.  At  the  back  of  the  latter  process 
a  sharp  edge  is  felt,  which  is  formed  by  the  inner  margin  of  the  groove  for  the 
tendon  of  the  tibialis  posticus  ;  the  tendon  itself  covers  the  posterior  surface  of  the 
malleolus,  and  is  rendered  prominent  by  inverting  the  foot.  The  head  of  the  fibula 
is  subcutaneous,  as  has  been  before  mentioned  ;  the  shaft  is  surrounded  by  muscles, 
bat  it  can  be  felt  through  them  in  the  lower  half  at  least  of  the  leg,  and  it  will  be 
remembered  that  it  is  placed  considerably  farther  back  in  the  leg  than  the  shaft  of 
the  tibia  ;  near  the  ankle,  a  triangular  portion  of  the  bone  comes  to  the  surface,  and 
is  continued  down  to  the  external  malleolus. 

Along  the  concavity  of  the  anterior  edge  of  the  tibia,  the  prominence  formed  by 
the  fleshy  belly  of  the  tibialis  anticus  is  seen,  and  external  to  this  is  the  much  less 
distinct  and  narrower  extensor  longus  digitorum.  The  tendons  of  the  muscles 
appear  in  the  lower  third  of  the  leg,  and  between  them  also  that  of  the  extensor 
proprius  hallucis  ;  they  are  brought  into  view  most  distinctly  by  flexing  the  ankle 
and  extending  the  toes.  From  the  head  of  the  fibula  downwards,  the  peroneus 
longus  and  brevis  muscles  form  an  elongated  swelling,  from  which  the  tendons  can 
be  traced  descending  behind  the  external  malleolus.  Posteriorly  the  elevation  of 
the  calf  is  formed  by  the  gastrocnemius  muscle,  which  terminates  about  the  middle 
of  the  leg  in  the  tendo  Achillis  ;  the  inner  head  of  the  gastrocnemius  is  the  larger, 
and  descends  lower  than  the  outer.  On  each  side  of  the  gastrocnemius  and  tendo 
Achillis,  a  portion  of  the  soleus  comes  to  the  surface  ;  and  the  characteristic  form 
of  the  gastrocnemius,  depending  upon  the  peculiar  structure  of  the  muscle  (Vol.  II, 
p.  262),  as  well  as  the  extent  and  shape  of  the  projecting  portions  of  the  soleus,  are 
brought  into  view  by  raising  the  body  on  the  toes.  The  tendo  Achillis  gradually 
becomes  narrower  as  it  approaches  the  heel,  but  it  widens  again  a  little  as  it  passes 
over  the  tuberosity  of  the  os  calcis  to  its  insertion.  Between  it  and  the  malleolus, 
on  each  side,  is  a  well-marked  hollow,  that  on  the  outer  side  being  the  deeper  ;  in 
the  inner  of  these,  the  tendons  of  the  tibialis  posticus  and  flexor  longus  digitorum, 
and  the  posterior  tibial  vessels  and  nerve  are  superficial. 

Both  the  external  and  internal  saphenous  veins  are  visible  beneath  the  skin  of 
the  leg,  together  with  numerous  tributaries  and  communicating  branches.  The 
internal  is  the  larger,  and,  after  crossing  in  front  of  the  internal  malleolus,  runs 
upwards  just  behind  the  inner  border  of  the  tibia  ;  the  external  passes  behind  the 
outer  malleolus  and  then  ascends  over  the  middle  of  the  calf  to  the  ham.  Each 
vein  is  accompanied  by  the  nerve  of  the  same  name. 

The  bifurcation  of  the  popliteal  artery  takes  place  about  two  inches  (5  cm.)  below 


48  SUPERFICIAL    ANATOMY    OF    THE    LOWER    LIMB. 

the  knee-joint,  and  on  a  level  with  the  lower  part  of  the  tubercle  of  the  tibia.  The 
course  of  the  anterior  tibial  artery  is  marked  on  the  front  of  the  leg  by  a  line  drawn 
from  a  point  midway  between  the  head  of  the  fibula  and  the  prominence  of  the  outer 
tuberosity  of  the  tibia  to  the  centre  of  the  ankle-joint.  The  intermuscular  space  in 
which  the  artery  lies  is  also  indicated  by  a  depression  which  is  seen  at  the  outer 
border  of  the  tibialis  anticus  when  the  muscle  is  called  into  action.  The  posterior 
tibial  artery  runs  from  the  centre  of  the  ham  to  the  mid-point  of  a  line  drawn  from 
the  tip  of  the  internal  malleolus  to  the  lower  end  of  the  inner  border  of  the  calcanean 
tuberosity  ;  beneath  this  spot,  the  vessel  divides  into  the  internal  and  external 
plantar  arteries.  The  posterior  tibial  artery  is  covered  by  the  gastrocnemius  and 
soleus  for  about  two-thirds  of  its  length,  but  in  the  lower  third  it  is  superficial,  and 
may  be  felt  pulsating  in  the  interval  between  the  tendo  Achillis  and  the  tibia. 
About  three  inches  (7'5  cm.)  below  the  knee,  it  gives  off  the  large  peroneal  branch, 
which  follows  the  direction  of  the  fibula,  and  terminates  behind  the  external 
malleolus. 


THE    ANKLE    AND    FOOT. 


Of  the  two  malleoli,  the  internal  is  usually  the  more  prominent,  but  the  external 
descends  lower  and  also  projects  farther  back,  having  its  point,  as  a  rule,  about 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  (2  cm.)  nearer  to  the  heel  than  that  of  the  internal  malleolus. 
On  the  dorsum  of  the  foot,  the  tarsal  bones  are  not  usually  to  be  distinguished  individu- 
ally, but  the  head  of  the  astragalus  not  unf requently  forms  a  considerable  projection 
when  the  ankle-joint  is  extended  ;  and  if  the  arch  of  the  foot  is  flattened,  it  often 
protrudes  markedly  on  the  inner  side.  Along  the  inner  side  of  the  foot,  the  tube- 
rosity of  the  os  calcis  is  first  felt,  and  then,  about  an  inch  (2*5  cm.)  below  the  internal 
malleolus,  the  sustentaculum  tali  of  the  same  bone  ;  in  front  of  the  latter,  and 
about  an  inch  and  a  half  (4  cm.)  from  the  malleolus,  the  tuberosity  of  the  navicular 
bone  is  prominent,  and  to  it  the  tendon  of  the  tibialis  posticus  may  be  followed  from 
the  back  of  the  internal  malleolus  ;  the  finger  next  passes  over  the  internal  cuneiform 
bone,  and  recognizes  the  base  of  the  first  metatarsal  bone  as  a  slightly  prominent 
ridge  ;  from  this,  the  shaft  of  the  bone  may  be  traced  forwards  beneath  the  skin  to 
its  expanded,  and  often  unduly  prominent,  head,  below  which  the  sesamoid  bones 
may  be  felt  on  the  plantar  aspect  of  the  mctatarso-phalangeal  articulation.  On  the 
outer  side  of  the  foot,  nearly  the  whole  of  the  external  surface  of  the  os  calcis  is  sub- 
cutaneous, and  the  peroneal  spine  of  the  bone  may  often  be  felt  a  little  below  and  in 
front  of  the  external  malleolus.  The  anterior  extremity  of  the  os  calcis  may  be 
distinguished  when  the  foot  is  inverted,  forming  a  marked  prominence  above  the 
level  of  the  cuboid  bone,  and  in  front  of  this,  distant  about  two  and  a  half  inches 
(G  cm.)  from  the  external  malleolus,  the  projecting  tuberosity  at  the  base  of  the  fifth 
metatarsal  bone  is  easily  felt. 

The  interarticular  cleft  of  the  ankle-joint  is  placed  about  half  an  inch  (1  cm.) 
above  the  tip  of  the  internal  malleolus.  The  transverse  tarsal  articulation,  at  which 
Chopart's  amputation  is  practised,  runs  from  immediately  behind  the  tuberosity  of 
the  navicular  bone,  outwards  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  astragalus  and  the  anterior 
extremity  of  the  os  calcis,  to  end  a  little  in  front  of  the  mid-point  between  the  tip  of 
the  external  malleolus  and  the  tuberosity  of  the  fifth  metatarsal  bone.  The  line  of 
the  tarso-metatarsal  articulations  is  very  irregular :  commencing  immediately 
behind  the  base  of  the  first  metatarsal  bone,  it  passes  at  first  transversely  between 
that  bone  and  the  internal  cuneiform,  then  turns  sharply  backwards  for  a  full  half- 
inch  (15  mm.)  to  reach  the  cleft  between  the  middle  cuneiform  and  second 
metatarsal  bones,  next  advances  for  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  (5  mm.),  and  then  is 
continued  outwards,  with  a  slight  inclination  backwards,  between  the  outer  three 


THE    ANKLE   AND    FOOT.  49 

metatarsal  bones  in  front  and  the  external  cuneiform  and  cuboid  bones  behind,  to  its 
termination  behind  the  tuberosity  of  the  fifth  metatarsal  bone. 

Over  the  front  of  the  ankle,  the  tendons  of  the  anterior  muscles  of  the  leg  are 
bound  down  by  the  anterior  annular  ligament ;  they  can  be  readily  distinguished 
when  the  joint  is  flexed,  spreading  over  the  dorsum  of  the  foot,  and  disposed  in  the 
following  order  : — the  most  internal  and  the  largest  is  the  tibialis  anticus ;  next 
comes  the  extensor  proprius  hallucis,  and  then  the  extensor  longus  digitorum, 
dividing  into  its  four  slips  for  the  smaller  toes  ;  lastly,  proceeding  from  the  outer 
side  of  the  long  extensor  to  the  base  of  the  fifth  metatarsal  bone  is  the  peroneus 
tertius  ;  the  last  named  is,  however,  not  unfrequently  wanting.  The  anterior  tibial 
vessels  and  nerve  are  placed,  opposite  the  ankle-joint,  between  the  tendons  of  the 
extensor  proprius  hallucis  and  extensor  longus  digitorum.  Beneath  the  tendons  of 
the  extensor  longus  digitorum,  on  the  dorsum  of  the  foot,  is  placed  the  extensor 
brevis  digitorum,  the  fleshy  belly  of  which  produces  a  distinct  swelling  over  the 
tarsal  region.  The  fleshy  mass  on  the  inner  margin  of  the  foot  is  formed  by  the 
abductor  and  flexor  brevis  hallucis  muscles  ;  and  that  on  the  outer  border  by  the 
abductor  and  flexor  brevis  minimi  digiti. 

In  the  sole,  the  tuberosity  of  the  os  calcis  and  the  heads  of  the  metatarsal 
bones  are  easily  felt,  but  in  the  intervening  region  the  bones  are  not  to.  be 
distinguished.  The  individual  muscles  are  also  obscured  by  the  thickness  of 
the  integument  and  the  manner  in  which  the  parts  are  bound  together  by  the 
strong  plantar  fascia.  When  the  arch  of  the  foot  is  well  developed  the  parts 
of  the  sole  that  rest  on  the  ground  in  standing  are  the  heel,  a  strip  near  the  outer 
border  of  the  foot,  the  heads  of  the  metatarsal  bones,  and  the  ends  of  the  toes. 
The  skin  over  these  parts  is  thick,  hard,  and  smooth,  but  in  the  hollow  of  the  foot 
it  is  soft  and  wrinkled.  The  sole  of  the  infant  is  flatter  than  that  of  the  adult, 
and  is  marked  by  lines  similar  to  those  seen  in  the  palm  of  the  hand,  but 
these  disappear  more  or  less  completely  as  age  advances. 

On  the  back  of  the  foot,  the  arch  or  plexus  of  veins  shows  plainly  through 
the  skin,  and  its  extremities  may  be  followed  into  the  internal  and  external 
saphenous  veins  respectively.  The  musculo-cutaneous  and  external  saphenous 
nerves  are  not  uncommonly  visible  through  the  skin. 

The  dorsal  artery  of  the  foot  extends  from  the  centre  of  the  ankle-joint  to  the 
back  of  the  first  intermetatarsal  space,  and  it  may  be  felt  pulsating  midway  between 
the  tendons  of  the  extensor  proprius  hallucis  and  extensor  longus  digitorum.  Just 
before  its  ending  it  is  crossed  by  the  innermost  slip  of  the  extensor  brevis 
digitorum.  The  external  plantar  artery  runs  from  the  bifurcation  of  the  posterior 
tibial  (p.  48)  obliquely  across  the  sole  to  within  an  inch  (2'5  cm.)  of  the  tuberosity  of 
the  fifth  metatarsal  bone,  and  then  is  directed  more  transversely  inwards  to  the 
back  of  the  first  interosseous  space,  where  it  meets  the  termination  of  the  dorsal 
artery.  The  internal  plantar  artery  is  much  smaller  than  the  external  ;  its  position 
may  be  indicated  by  a  line  drawn  from  the  place  of  bifurcation  of  the  posterior 
tibial  to  the  under  part  of  the  metatarso-phalangeal  articulation  of  the  great  toe. 

The  metatarso-phalangeal  articulations  are  situated  about  an  inch  (2'5  cm.) 
behind  the  web  of  the  toes. 


50 


ANATOMY   OF    HERNIA. 


al  branch  of  qesiUe  -cru.rcd.rwoe. 


5?  .2    •S'S    «    s  j. 

&ES  g  § 
.~i  S  S^ 
•s  ^   S  II   ®       s 

I       ^§lll 


INGUINAL    HERNIA.  51 


ANATOMY     OP     THE     GROIN"  :     HERNIA. 

Two  kinds  of  abdominal  hernias  have  such  definite  and  important  relations  that, 
the  regions  concerned  require  special  notice  in  a  work  on  anatomy.  These  are 
inguinal  hern-tee,  which  are  associated  with  the  spermatic  cord  in  their  passage 
through  the  abdominal  wall,  and  femoral  hernice,  which  descend  through  the 
femoral  canal  on  the  inner  side  of  the  femoral  vessels. 

INGUINAL     HERNIA. 

The  inguinal  canal,  through  which  the  spermatic  cord  passes  from  the  cavity 
of  the  abdomen  to  the  scrotum,  begins  at  the  internal  abdominal  ring,  and  ends 
at  the  external  ring.  It  is  oblique  in  its  direction,  being  nearly  parallel  with  and 
immediately  above  the  inner  half  of  Poupart's  ligament,  and  it  measures  about  an 
inch  and  a  half  (3'5  cm.)  in  length.  The  external  ring  (Vol.  II,  p.  329)  is  imme- 
diately above  and  external  to  the  pubic  spine  ;  the  internal  (ib.,  p.  336)  is  midway 
between  the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine  and  the  pubic  symphysis,  and  half  an  inch 
(1  cm.)  above  Poupart's  ligament.  In  front,  the  canal  is  bounded  by  the  aponeurosis 
of  the  external  oblique  muscle  in  its  whole  length,  and  at  the  outer  end  also  by  the 
fleshy  part  of  the  internal  oblique  ;  behind  it  is  the  transversalis  fascia,  together  with, 
towards  the  inner  end,  the  conjoined  tendon  of  the  two  deeper  abdominal  muscles 
and  the  triangular  fascia.  Above  the  canal  are  the  arched  lower  borders  of  the 
internal  oblique  and  transversalis  muscles ;  and  below,  it  is  bounded  by  Poupart's 
and  Gimbernat's  ligaments,  which  separate  it  from  the  sheath  of  the  large  blood- 
vessels descending  to  the  thigh,  and  from  the  femoral  canal  at  the  inner  side  of 
those  vessels.  Below  the  internal  ring,  and  separated  therefrom  by  Poupart's 
ligament,  is  the  external  iliac  artery,  giving  off  its  epigastric  branch,  which  at  first 
runs  inwards,  and  then  ascends  close  to  the  inner  border  of  the  opening  (fig.  28). 

The  spermatic  cord,  which  occupies  the  inguinal  canal,  is  composed  of 
the  arteiy,  veins,  lymphatics,  nerves,  and  excretory  duct  of  the  testis  (vas  deferens), 
together  with  a  quantity  of  loose  areolar  tissue. 

Coverings  of  the  cord. — The  coverings  given  from  the  constituent  parts  of 
the  abdominal  wall  to  the  spermatic  cord,  besides  the  integuments,  are,  from  the 
external  ring  the  intercolumnar  or  spermatic  fascia,  the  cremasteric  muscle 
and  fascia  from  the  lower  border  of  the  internal  oblique  muscle,  and  a  thin,  funnel- 
shaped  prolongation  of  the  transversalis  fascia  from  the  edge  of  the  inner  ring 
(infundibuliform  fascia).  Beneath  the  last,  the  areolar  tissue  uniting  together  the 
constituents  of  the  cord  is  continuous  with  the  subperitoneal  areolar  layer. 

Peritoneal  fossae. — When  the  lower  part  of  the  anterior  abdominal  wall 
is  viewed  from  within,  the  peritoneum  is  seen  to  form  a  series  of  depressions, 
which  are  separated  by  more  or  less  prominent  folds.  Thus,  along  the  middle  line 
is  the  plica  urachi  (plica  umlilicalis  media'),  which  extends  from  the  apex  of  the 
bladder  upwards  along  the  urachus  to  the  umbilicus;  a  little  outside  this  is  the 
well-marked  plica  hypogastrica  (plica  umlilicalis  lateralis),  containing  the  obliterated 
hypogastric  artery,  and  also  extending  from  the  bladder  to  the  umbilicus  ;  and  still 

Fig.  22. — ANATOMY  OF  HERNIA  :  SUPERFICIAL  VIEW.     (Gr.  D.  T.) 

On  the  left  side,  only  the  skin  and  superficial  fasciae  have  been  removed,  exposing  above  Poupart's 
ligament  the  aponeurosis  of  the  external  oblique,  with  the  spermatic  cord  emerging  through  the  external 
abdominal  ring,  and  below  Poupart's  ligament  the  fascia  lata  with  the  internal  saphenous  vein  passing 
through  the  lower  part  of  the  saphenous  opening  and  piercing  the  femoral  sheath. 

On  the  right  side,  the  inguinal  portion  of  the  external  cblique  has  been  removed,  bringing  into  view 
part  of  the  internal  oblique  muscle  and  the  cremaster  ;  and  below  Poupart's  ligament  the  iliac  part  of 
fascia  lata  has  been  detached  from  Poupart's  ligament  and  reflected,  so  as  to  expose  the  front  of  the 
femoral  sheath. 

E  2 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    GROIN  :     HERNIA. 


s     -S     x 


INGUINAL    HERNIA. 


53 


Fig.  23. — ANATOMY  OF  HERNIA  :  DEEP  VIEW.     (G.  D.  T.) 

On  the  right  side  parts  of  the  external  and  internal  oblique  muscles  together  with  the  cremaster 
have  been  taken  away,  so  as  to  show  the  spermatic  cord  invested  by  the  infundibuliform  fascia  lying 
in  the  inguinal  canal.  By  the  removal  of  a  part  of  the  front  of  the  femoral  sheath  the  femoral  vessels 
have  been  exposed  and  the  femoral  canal  opened.  Gl.,  gland  occupying  the  femoral  ring. 

On  the  left  side  parts  of  the  two  oblique  muscles  have  been  removed,  and  also  a  portion  of  the 
spermatic  cord.  Poupart's  ligament  has  been  divided,  and  the  cut  portions  turned  aside,  thus  exposing 
the  deep  femoral  arch.  Tr.  F.,  triangular  fascia  ;  G.  L. ,  Gimbernat's  ligament.  The  conjoined  tendon 
on  this  side  is  very  wide,  and  is  prolonged  outwards  along  the  deep  femoral  arch  as  far  as  the  internal 
abdominal  ring. 

more  externally  is  a  slight  elevation,  the  plica  epigastrica,  over  the  epigastric  vessels. 
The  depressions  are  accordingly  three  in  number  on  each  side,  viz.,  from  without 
inwards,  1,  the  fovea  inguinalis  lateralis,  on  the  outer  side  of  the  plica  epigastrica, 


Poupart's  liga- 
ment .  .  . 

anterior  crural 
nerve  .  . 

external  iliac 


vas  deferens 


oU.  liypogastric  ] 
artery    . 


fovea  femoralis 


pig  24. THE  LOWER  PART  OP  THE  ANTERIOR  ABDOMINAL  WALL  IN  THE  MALE  VIEWED  FROM  BEHIND, 

SHOWING  THE  PERITONEAL  FOLDS  AND  FOSS<£.       (After  JoCSSel.) 

the  deepest  part  of  which  is  opposite  the  internal  abdominal  ring ;  2,  the  fovea 
inguinalis  mesialis  between  the  plica  epigastrica  and  the  plica  hypogastrica  ;  and 
3,  the  fovea  supravesicalis,  between  the  plica  hypogastrica  and  plica  urachi, 
immediately  above  and  external  to  the  apex  of  the  bladder.  Of  these,  the  fovea 
inguinalis  mesialis  is  the  most  strongly  marked,  and  often  extends  inwards  for  some 


54  ANATOMY    OF    THE    GROIN  :    HERNIA. 

distance  beneath  the  plica  hypogastrica  over  the  back  of  the  rectus  muscle.  Below 
the  last  fossa,  and  separated  therefrom  by  the  inner  end  of  Poupart's  ligament, 
there  is  often  to  be  recognised  another  slight  depression,  the  fovea  femoralis,  over 
the  position  of  the  femoral  ring,  to  the  inner  side  of  the  external  iliac  vein  and  the 
vas  deferens,  or  the  round  ligament  of  the  uterus,  according  to  the  sex. 

FOKMS  or  INGUINAL  HERNIA. — Two  principal  forms  of  inguinal  hernia  are 
described,  which  are  distinguished  according  to  the  part  of  the  canal  which  they 
first  enter,  as  well  as  by  the  position  which  they  bear  with  respect  to  the  epigastric 
artery.  Thus,  when  the  hernia  takes  the  course  of  the  inguinal  canal  from  its 
commencement,  it  is  named  oblique,  because  of  the  direction  of  the  canal,  or 
external,  from  the  position  of  its  neck  with  respect  to  the  epigastric  artery.  On  the 
other  hand,  when  the  protruded  part,  without  following  the  length  of  the  canal, 
passes  at  once  through  its  posterior  wall  at  a  point  opposite  the  external  abdominal 
ring,  the  hernia  is  named,  from  its  course,  direct,  or,  from  its  relation  to  the 
epigastric  artery,  internal. 

Oblique  or  external  inguinal  hernia. — In  the  common  form  of  this  hernia 
the  protruded  viscus  carries  before  it  a  covering  of  serous  membrane  (the  sac 
of  the  hernia),  derived  from  the  outer  fossa  of  the  peritoneum  (p.  53)  ;  and,  in 
passing  along  the  inguinal  canal  to  the  scrotum,  it  is  successively  invested  by  the 
coverings  given  to  the  spermatic  cord  from  the  abdominal  parietes.  The  hernia 
and  its  sac  lie  directly  in  front  of  the  vessels  of  the  spermatic  cord,  and  do  not 
extend  below  the  testis,  even  when  the  tumour  is  of  large  size. 

There  are  two  other  varieties  of  oblique  inguinal  hernia,  in  which  the  peculiarity  depends 
on  the  condition  of  the  process  of  peritoneum  (JWOCCSSHS  vaginalis)  that  receives  the  testis 
when  this  organ  descends  from  the  abdomen.  In  ordinary  circumstances  the  part  of  the 
peritoneal  process  connected  immediately  with  the  testis  becomes  separated  after  birth  from 
the  general  cavity  of  that  serous  membrane  by  the  obliteration  of  the  intervening  canal ;  and 
the  hernial  protrusion  occurring-  after  such  obliteration  has  been  completed,  carries  with  it  a 
distinct  serous  investment — the  sac.  But  if  this  process  of  obliteration  should  not  take  place, 
and  if  a  hernia  should  be  formed,  the  protruded  part  is  then  received  into  the  cavity  of  the 
processus  vaginalis,  which  serves  in  the  place  of  its  sac.  In  this  case  the  hernia  is  named 
congenital.  It  is  thus  designated,  because  the  condition  necessary  for  its  formation  only 
exists  normally  about  the  time  of  birth  ;  but  the  same  kind  of  hernia  is  occasionally  found  to 
be  first  formed  in  the  adult,  obviously  in  consequence  of  the  processus  vaginalis  remaining 
unclosed,  and  still  continuous  with  the  peritoneum.  The  congenital  hernia,  should  it  reach 
the  scrotum,  passes  below  the  testis ;  and,  this  organ  being  embedded  in  the  protruded  viscus, 
a  careful  examination  is  necessary  in  order  to  detect  its  position.  This  peculiarity  serves  to 
distinguish  the  congenital  from  the  ordinary  form  of  the  disease. 

To  the  second  variety  of  inguinal  hernia,  in  which  the  distinguishing  character  depends 
on  the  state  of  the  tunica  vaginalis  testis,  the  name  infantile  has  been  applied  (Hey).  The 
hernia  in  this  case  is  covered  with  a  distinct  sac,  which  is  again  invested  by  the  upper  end  of 
the  tunica  vaginalis.  The  relative  position  of  the  two  serous  membranes  (the  hernial  sac 
and  the  tunica  vaginalis)  may  be  accounted  for  by  supposing  the  hernia  to  descend  when  the 
process  of  the  peritoneum,  which  accompanies  the  testis  from  the  abdomen,  has  been  merely 
closed  at  the  upper  end,  but  not  obliterated  along  the  front  of  the  cord.  Hence  during  an 
operation  in  such  a  case,  the  hernial  sac  is  met  with  only  after  another  serous  bag  (the 
abnormal  prolongation  upwards  of  the  tunica  vaginalis  testis)  has  been  divided.  The 
peculiarity  here  described  has  been  repeatedly  found  present  in  the  recently-formed  hernias  of 
grown  persons.  The  term  infantile,  therefore,  like  congenital,  has  reference  to  the  condition 
of  certain  parts,  rather  than  to  the  period  of  life  at  which  the  disease  is  first  formed. 

In  the  female,  oblique  inguinal  hernia  follows  the  course  of  the  round  ligament 
of  the  uterus  along  the  inguinal  canal,  in  the  same  manner  as  in  the  male  it  follows 
the  spermatic  cord.  After  escaping  from  the  external  abdominal  ring,  the  hernia 
lodges  in  the  labium  pudendi.  The  coverings  are  the  same  as  those  in  the  male 
body,  with  the  exception  of  the  cremaster,  which  does  not  exist  in  the  female  ;  but 
it  occasionally  happens  that  some  fibres  of  the  internal  oblique  muscle  are  drawn 


INGUINAL   HERNIA. 


55 


down  over  this  hernia  in   loops,  so  as  to  have  the  appearance  of  a  cremaster 
(Cloquet). 


peritoneum 


internal  abdominal  ring 


.  spermatic  cord 


tunica  vaginalis 


, 


Fig.  25. — PERSISTENT  VAGINAL  PROCESS  OF  THE  PERITONEUM.     (After  Joessel.) 

The  preparation  is  from  a  man  20  years  of  age.  The  tunica  vaginalis  is  cut  off  from  the  vagina 
process,  the  tubular  portion  of  which  ends  blindly  a  little  above  the  testicle.  In  the  inguinal  canal  the 
process  becomes  gradually  narrower  up  to  the  internal  abdominal  ring,  through  which  a  probe  is 
introducer!  into  the  cavity. 

A  strictly  congenital  inguinal  hernia  may  occur  in  the  female,  the  protruded  parts  being 
received  into  the  little  diverticulum  of  the  peritoneum  (canal  of  Nuck),  which  sometimes 
extends  into  the  inguinal  canal  with  the  round  ligament.  But  as  this  process  of  the 
peritoneum,  in  such  circumstances,  would  probably  not  differ  in  any  respect  from  the 
ordinary  sac,  there  are  no  means  of  distinguishing  a  congenital  hernia  in  the  female  body. 

Direct  or  internal  inguinal  hernia. — Instead  of  following  the  whole  course 
of  the  inguinal  canal,  in  the  manner  of  the  hernia  above  described,  the  viscus  in 
this  case  is  protruded  from  the  abdomen  to  the  groin  directly  through  the  lower  end 
of  the  canal,  at  the  external  abdominal  ring.  At  the  part  of  the  abdominal  wall 
through  which  the  direct  inguinal  hernia  finds  its  way,  there  is  recognised  on  its 
posterior  aspect  a  triangular  interval,  the  sides  of  which  are  formed  by  the  epigastric 
artery,  and  the  margin  of  the  rectus  muscle,  and  the  base  by  Poupart's  ligament 
(fig.  28).  It  is  commonly  named  the  triangle  of  Hesselbach.  The  triangle 
measures  about  two  inches  (5  cm.)  from  above  down,  and  an  inch  and  a  half 


56  ANATOMY   OF   THE    GROIN  :    HERNIA, 

(3 -5  cm.)  transversely  at  its  base.  In  this  area  the  abdominal  wall  consists  of, 
besides  the  integuments,  1,  the  aponeurosis  of  the  external  oblique  muscle,  which 
is  perforated  towards  the  lower  and  inner  corner  of  the  space  by  the  external 
abdominal  ring ;  2,  the  inner  portion  of  the  cremaster  muscle  covering  the  sper- 
matic cord  at  the  lower  and  outer  part  of  the  space,  and  above  this  the  lower 
fibres  of  the  internal  oblique  and  transversalis  muscles  passing  to  their  insertion  by 
the  conjoined  tendon,  which,  as  a  rule,  extends  over  the  inner  two-thirds  of  the 
lower  part  of  the  triangle  ;  3,  transversalis  fascia  ;  4,  subperitoneal  tissue  ;  and  5, 
peritoneum. 

The  conjoined  tendon  varies  greatly  in  its  development.  In  many  cases  it  is  very  slight, 
and  scarcely  to  be  distinguished,  while  in  others  its  deeper  portion,  derived  from  the  trans- 
versalis muscle,  covers  the  whole  breadth  of  the  triangle,  reaching  outwards  along  the  deep 
femoral  arch  as  far  as  the  internal  abdominal  ring  (fig.  23,  left  side).  Sometimes  the  outer 
part  is  detached  from  the  rest,  and  forms  a  band  which  has  been  designated  lig  amentum 
interfoveolare  or  ligament  of  Hesselbacft,  while  to  the  remaining  inner  portion  the  name  of /« fa; 
inguinalis  or  ligament  of  Henle  has  been  given.  (See  W.  His,  in  die  anatomiselie  Nomenclatur, 
1895,  p.  121  ;  and  K.  M.  Douglas,  The  Anatomy  of  the  Transversalis  Muscle  'and  its  Relation 
to  Inguinal  Hernia,  Journ.  Anat.,  xxiv,  1890.) 

The  distance  of  the  obliterated  hypogastric  artery  from  the  middle  line,  and  with  it  the 
breadth  of  the  fovea  supravesicalis,  is  also  subject  to  variation.  In  most  cases,  however,  the 
hypogastric  cord  ascends  altogether  behind  the  rectus  muscle,  and  therefore  an  internal  hernia 
will  project  in  the  mesial  inguinal  fossa.  Only  in  rare  cases  does  a  hernia  protrude  in  the 
supravesical  hollow,  between  the  obliterated  hypogastric  artery  and  the  edge  of  the  rectus. 

A  hernia  emerging  to  the  inner  side  of  the  epigastric  vessels  in  the  majority  of 
cases  protrudes  in  the  inner  part  of  the  triangle  of  Hesselbach,  and  is  forced  onwards 
directly  into  the  external  abdominal  ring.  The  coverings  of  such  a  hernia,  taking 
them  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  successively  applied  to  the  protruded  viscus,  are 
the  following  : — The  peritoneal  sac  and  the  subperitoneal  tissue  which  adheres  to  it, 
the  transversalis  fascia,  the  conjoined  tendon  of  the  internal  oblique  and  transversalis 
muscles,  and  the  spermatic  fascia  derived  from  the  margin  of  the  external  abdominal 
ring,  together  with  the  superficial  fascia  and  skin.  With  regard  to  the  conjoined 
tendon,  this  hernia  may  be  covered  by  it,  or  may  pass  through  an  opening  in  its 
fibres. 

The  spermatic  cord  is  commonly  placed  behind  the  outer  part  of  the  hernia.  The 
hernial  sac  is  not,  however,  in  contact  with  the  vessels  of  the  cord,  the  investments, 
given  from  the  transversalis  fascia  to  those  vessels  and  to  the  hernia  respectively,  as 
well  as  the  cremasteric  fascia,  being  interposed. 

But  the  spot  at  which  an  internal  inguinal  hernia  passes  through  the  triangle  of 
Hesselbach  is  subject  to  some  variation,  and  there  is  a  second  form  of  internal 
hernia  which  differs  somewhat  in  its  course  and  relations  from  the  foregoing.  In 
this  variety  the  hernia  protrudes  to  the  outer  side  of  the  conjoined  tendon,  between 
that  and  the  epigastric  vessels.  Such  a  protrusion  passes  through  a  considerable 
portion  of  the  inguinal  canal  to  reach  the  external  ring,  and  has  therefore  a  certain 
degree  of  obliquity,  whence  this  variety  is  frequently  termed  internal  oblique,  inguinal 
hernia.  It  is  also  known  as  superior  internal  hernia,  the  direct  form  being  called 
inferior  internal.  As  an  internal  oblique  hernia  passes  outside  the  conjoined  tendon, 
it  has  no  covering  derived  from  that  structure,  but  it  receives  one  from  the  cremaster 
in  the  same  way  as  an  external  hernia. 

Direct  inguinal  hernia  is  very  rarely  met  with  in  the  female.  In  the  single  case 
observed  by  Richard  Quain,  as  well  as  in  the  few  cases  found  recorded  in  books,  the 
hernia  though  not  inconsiderable  in  size  was  still  covered  by  the  tendon  of  the 
external  oblique  muscle. 


FEMORAL    HERNIA. 


57 


FEMORAL    HERNIA. 


A  femoral  hernia  leaves  the  abdomen  at  the  groin,  passing  beneath  Poupart's 
ligament,  and  over  the  anterior  border  of  the  hip-bone  immediately  at  the  inner  side 
of  the  femoral  vessels.  It  takes  a  downward  course  through  the  innermost  com- 
partment of  the  femoral  sheath  till  it  reaches  the  saphenous  opening,  when  it  turns 
forwards  through  the  opening  towards  the  front  of  the  thigh,  and  is  then  bent  upwards 
in  the  groin. 


iliac  fascia 

I 


Poupart's  ligament 


•pectineal  fascia 

I 

!     Gimbernat's  ligament 
! 

•-.  ! 

•  -•  -,,.''      /       outer  pillar 

•'•;••  /.'."<':/        inner  pillar 


Fig.  26. — POUPART'S    LIGAMENT   AND  THE    NEIGHBOURING   FASCIAE    IN    RELATION   TO    THE    HIP-BONE. 

(G.  D.  T.) 

The  space  between  Poupart's  ligament  and  the  hip-bone  is  seen  to  be  subdivided  into  three  com- 
partments by  the  fascise.  Anteriorly  is  the  vascular  compartment,  and  posteriorly  are  the  two 
muscular  compartments — the  larger  one  externally  occupied  by  the  ilio-psoas,  and  the  smaller  one 
internally  occupied  by  the  upper  end  of  the  pectineus  :  the  two  are  separated  by  *  the  ilio-pectineal 
intermuscular  septum  attached  to  the  ilio-pectineal  eminence. 

The  concave  ilio-pubic  margin  of  the  hip-bone  is  bridged  across  in  the  recent 
state  by  Poupart's  ligament  or  the  (superficial)  femoral  arch  (ligamentum  mguinale), 
extending  from  the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine  to  the  pubic  spine.  The  intervening 
space,  which  is  somewhat  diminished  at  the  internal  angle  by  Gimbernat's  ligament 
(ligamentum  lacunare),  is  mainly  occupied  by  the  ilio-psoas  muscle  and  the  external 
iliac  vessels  on  their  way  into  the  thigh,  and  the  upper  end  of  the  pectineus  muscle. 


58 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    GROIN  :    HERNIA, 


These  structures  are  invested  by  special  fasciae,  which  by  their  connection  together 
subdivide  the  space  into  three  chief  compartments. 

The  vascular  compartment  (lacuna  vasorum),  situated  in  front  of  the  others,  is 
bounded  anteriorly  by  Poupart's  ligament  and  the  continuation  of  the  transversalis 
fascia  into  the  front  of  the  femoral  sheath,  with  its  thickening  termed  the  deep  femoral 


zous  NERVE 


AKIt.  CRURAL  NERVE 
lUAC  FASCIA 


/      ILTAC 

/        «' 

/       CRURAL  BRANCH  OF  GENlTO-CRURALNERtfH 


AKTtRY 
FEfflOBAL  VErN 

-,,    -,,     .^  GLATJO   IN  FEHORAL  RINO 

,  ^v  "•'''/---"*  *^        / 

'  •  ,  Cll>l  SCR  WAT'S    LIGAMENT 
CORD 


Fig.  27. — DISSECTION  OP  THE  PARTS  BENEATH  POUPART'S  LIGAMENT.     2.     ((j.  D.  T.) 

The  femoral  vessels,  which  are  seen  enclosed  in  the  femoral  sheath,  have  been  divided  close  below 
Poupart's  ligament.  The  fasciae  forming  the  back  of  the  sheath,  and  the  subjacent  muscles  have  been 
divided  at  successively  lower  levels.  *  indicates  the  ilio-pectineal  intermuscular  septum  attached  to 
the  capsule  of  the  hip-joint  along  the  inner  part  of  its  anterior  surface. 

arch  (fig.  23)  ;  posteriorly  by  the  continuous  iliac  and  pectineal  fascias.  It  allows  of 
the  passage  into  the  thigh  of  the  external  iliac  vessels  and  the  crural  branch  of  the 
genito-crural  nerve,  the  vein  being  to  the  inner  side,  and  the  nerve  to  the  outer  side 
of  the  artery,  while  between  the  vein  and  Gimbernat's  ligament  is  the  interval  known 
as  the  femoral  ring.  The  iliac  compartment  (lacuna  musculorum),  the  largest  of 


FEMORAL    HERNIA. 


59 


the  three,  is  situated  outside  and  behind  the  foregoing :  it  is  bounded  posteriorly 
by  the  ilium,  anteriorly  by  Poupart's  ligament  and  the  iliac  fascia,  and  internally  is 
separated  from  the  pectineal  compartment  by  the  ilio-pectineal  intermuscular  septum : 
it  transmits  the  ilio-psoas  muscle  with  the  anterior  crural  and  external  cutaneous 
nerves.  The  pectineal  compartment,  lodging  the  upper  end  of  the  pectineus 
muscle,  is  between  the  pectineal  fascia  (or  pubic  portion  of  the  fascia  lata)  in  front 
and  the  superior  ramus  of  the  pubis  behind.  It  extends  only  a  short  distance 
upwards  beyond  Poupart's  ligament,  being  closed  above  by  the  attachment  of  the 
fascia  to  the  superior  border  of  the  pubic  ramus. 

At  the  upper  part  of  the  pectineal  fascia,  immediately  in  front  of  its  bony  attachment, 
is  a  thickening  formed  mainly  by  bundles  of  transverse  fibres,  which  are  closely  connected 
internally  with,  and  in  part  derived  from,  Gimbernat's  ligament.  This  is  the  pubic  ligament 
of  Astley  Cooper,  and  is  frequently  spoken  of  as  Cooper's  ligament. 


EPIGASTRIC    VESSELS 


XVAS   DEFEREN3 


Fit,  28  — INNER  VIEW  OP  THE  GROIN,  SHOWING  THE  INTERNAL  ABDOMINAL  AND  FEMORAL  RINGS.  (Modified 

from  Ellis.)  (G.  D.  T.) 

The  peritoneum  and  subperitoneal  tissue  have  been  removed  ;  and  the  rectus  and  tran.sversalis 
muscles  are  seen  covered  by  the  trausversalis  fascia.  The  ilio-psoas  muscle  and  external  cutaneous 
nerve  are  covered  by  the  iliac  fascia. 

F  R,  femoral  ring  ;  G,  Gimbernat's  ligament ;  PECT.,  pectineus  niuscle  covereil  by  fascia  ;  pub.,  pubic 
branch  of  epigastric  artery  anastomosing  with  pubic  of  obturator. 


60  ANATOMY    OF    THE    GROIN  :    HERNIA. 

The  femoral  or  crural  sheath  (figs.  22  and  23),  is  a  somewhat  funnel-shaped 
structure  surrounding  the  upper  parts  of  the  femoral  artery  and  vein.  It  is  wide 
above,  but  embraces  the  vessels  closely  below.  It  is  continuous  superiorly  with 
the  lining  fasciae  of  the  abdomen,  namely,  with  the  transversalis  fascia  in  front, 
and  the  iliac  fascia  behind.  On  removing  its  anterior  wall,  the  sheath  is  found 
to  be  divided  into  three  compartments  by  fibrous  septa ;  the  outer  compartment 
containing  the  femoral  artery,  the  middle,  the  femoral  vein,  and  the  inner  being 
occupied  merely  by  lymphatic  vessels,  a  gland,  and  some  fat.  The  inner  compart- 
ment is  about  half  an  inch  long,  and  from  its  being  the  passage  through  which 
the  hernia  descends,  has  been  called  the  femoral  or  crural  canal.  The  upper 
extremity  of  the  canal  presents  an  oval  aperture  towards  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen, 
usually  of  sufficient  size  to  admit  the  point  of  the  forefinger :  its  size,  however, 
varies  in  different  persons,  and  it  is  larger  in  the  female  than  in  the  male,  its 
transverse  diameter,  which  is  the  longest,  being  on  an  average  25mm.  in  the 
former,  and  15mm.  in  the  latter.  This  aperture  is  called  the  femoral  or  crural 
ring  (annulus  femoralis'),  and  is  covered  when  viewed  from  the  inside  by  perito- 
neum, which  at  this  spot  frequently  shows  a  slight  depression — -fovea  femoralis 
(p.  54),  and  beneath  that  by  the  subperitoneal  connective  tissue,  which  here  forms 
the  femoral  septum  (Cloquet).  On  the  outer  side  lies  the  external  iliac  vein  covered 
by  its  sheath,  but  on  the  other  three  sides  the  ring  is  bounded  by  very  unyielding 
structures.  In  front  are  the  femoral  arches,  the  superficial  being  formed  by  Poupart's 
ligament,  and  the  deep  by  a  variably  developed  bundle  of  fibres,  which,  springing 
from  the  under  surface  of  Poupart's  ligament  outside  the  femoral  vessels,  extends 
across  the  fore  part  of  the  femoral  sheath  and,  widening  at  its  inner  end,  is  fixed  to 
the  ilio-pectineal  line  behind  Gimbernat's  ligament.  Behind  the  ring  is  the  hip- 
bone covered  by  the  pectineus  muscle  and  the  thickened  upper  part  of  the  pectineal 
fascia  ;  and  on  the  inner  side  are  several  layers  of  fibrous  structure  connected  with 
the  ilio-pectineal  line — namely,  Gimbernat's  ligament,  the  conjoined  tendon  of  the 
two  deeper  abdominal  muscles,  and  the  transversalis  fascia,  with  the  deep  femoral 
arch.  The  last-mentioned  structures — those  bounding  the  ring  at  the  inner  side- 
present  more  or  less  sharp  margins  towards  the  opening. 

Relations  to  blood-vessels. — Besides  the  external  iliac  vein,  the  position  of 
which  has  been  already  stated,  the  epigastric  vessels  are  closely  related  to  the  ring, 
lying  above  its  outer  side.  It  not  infrequently  happens  that  an  aberrant  obturator 
artery  descends  into  the  pelvis  at  the  outer  side  of  the  ring,  or  immediately  across  it; 
and  in  rarer  cases  this  vessel  passes  in  front  of  the  ring  to  its  inner  side  (Vol.  II, 
p.  477).  A  pubic  vein,  also,  has  occasionally  the  same  course  ;  and  the 'small  pubic 
branch  of  the  epigastric  artery  will  be  generally  found  ramifying  on  the  superior 
aspect  of  Gimbernat's  ligament.  In  the  male,  the  spermatic  vessels  are  separated 
from  the  canal  only  by  the  femoral  arches. 

The  saphenous  opening  (fossa  ovalis)  of  the  fascia  lata  is  placed  at  the  upper 
and  inner  part  of  the  thigh,  immediately  below  Poupart's  ligament.  Its  upper 
extremity  is  about  one  inch  (2-5  cm.)  external  to  the  pubic  spine,  and  its  vertical 
extent  measures  from  one  and  a  half  to  two  inches  (4 — 5  cm.).  On  the  inner  side  the 
opening  is  not  sharply  defined,  the  pectineal  fascia  being  here  prolonged  over  its 
muscle,  and  passing  behind  the  femoral  vessels.  On  the  outer  side  of  the  opening, 
when  the  loose  tissue  in  its  area  constituting  the  cribriform  fascia  (fascia  cribrosa)  has 
been  removed,  the  iliac  portion  of  the  fascia  lata  forms  a  distinct  crescentic  edge 
known  as  thefakiform  border,  which  ends  above  and  below  in  curved  portions  termed 
the  superior  and  inferior  cornua.  Through  the  lower  part  of  the  opening  the 
internal  saphenous  vein  passes  backwards  to  enter  the  femoral  vein,  and  the  inferior 
cornu  curves  sharply  round  in  the  angle  between  the  two  vessels  to  join  the  pectineal 
fascia  internally.  _The  superior  cornu  is  thicker  and  less  curved  than  the  inferior  : 


FEMORAL    HERNIA.  61 

it  crosses  over  the  upper  and  inner  part  of  the  femoral  sheath  to  join  Poupart's 
and  Gimbernat's  ligaments,  its  terminal  portion  being  often  distinguished  as  the 
femoral  ligament  or  Hey's  ligament.  The  femoral  ligament  crosses  the  antero-internal 
aspect  of  the  femoral  canal,  and  the  closed  extremity  of  that  passage  lies  immediately 
behind  the  upper  part  of  the  saphenous  opening. 

Descent  of  the  hernia. — When  a  femoral  hernia  is  being  formed,  the  protruded 
part  is  at  first  vertical  in  its  course  ;  but  at  the  lower  end  of  the  canal  it  bends 
forwards  through  the  saphenous  opening,  and,  as  it  increases  in  size,  ascends  over  the 
iliac  part  of  the  fascia  lata  and  the  femoral  arch.  Within  the  canal  the  hernia  is  very 
small,  being  constricted  by  the  unyielding  structures  which  form  that  passage  ;  but 
when  it  has  passed  beyond  the  saphenous  opening,  it  enlarges  in  the  loose  fatty  layers 
of  the  groin  ;  and,  as  the  tumour  increases,  it  extends  outwards  in  the  groin  towards 
the  anterior  superior  iliac  spine. 

Coverings  of  the  hernia. — The  coverings  of  a  femoral  hernia  in  order  from 
within  outwards  are,  the  peritoneum  (which  forms  the  sac),  the  septum  femorale 
and  the  sheath  of  the  femoral  vessels. '  These  two  structures  combined  constitute  a 
single  covering,  known  as  the  fascia  propria  of  the  hernia  (Cooper).  It  sometimes 
happens  that  the  hernia  is  protruded  through  an  opening  in  the  sheath,  which  there- 
fore in  that  event  does  not  contribute  to  form  the  fascia  propria.  Lastly,  the  hernia 
is  covered  by  the  cribriform  fascia  stretching  across  the  saphenous  opening,  the 
superficial  fascia,  and  the  skin. 


62  THE    PERINEUM    OF    THE    MALE. 


THE     PERINEUM     OF     THE     MALE. 

The  perineum  is  the  region  which  is  included  within  the  outlet  of  the  pelvis,  and 
which  is  traversed  by  the  lower  end  of  the  rectum  and  by  the  urethra.  It  extends, 
therefore,  from  the  apex  of  the  subpubic  arch  in  front  to  the  tip  of  the  coccyx 
behind,  and  from  the  ischial  tuberosity  of  one  side  to  that  of  the  other.  It  is 
bounded  on  each  side,  at  the  fore  part,  by  the  conjoined  rami  of  the  pubis 
and  ischium,  and  at  the  back  part  by  the  great  sacro-sciatic  ligament,  together 
with  a  portion  of  the  lower  border  of  the  gluteus  maximus  muscle.  Its  form  is 
rather  heart-shaped  in  consequence  of  the  projection  of  the  coccyx  posteriorly  ;  it 
measures  about  three  and  a  half  inches  (9  cm.)  from  side  to  side,  and  about  four 
inches  (10  cm.)  over  the  curved  surface  (three  and  a  quarter  inches  in  a  straight 
line)  from  before  back  in  the  middle  line.  The  perineal  space  is  separated  from 
the  pelvic  cavity  above  by  the  recto-vesical  fascia  and  the  levatores  ani  muscles  ; 
its  depth  is  considerable  (from  two  to  three  inches)  at  the  posterior  and  outer 
part,  much  less  (not  exceeding  an  inch)  at  the  fore  part. 

The  perineal  space  is  conveniently  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  line  drawn  across 
from  one  ischial  tuberosity  to  the  other,  and  passing  immediately  in  front  of 
the  anus.  The  anterior  division  is  termed  the  urethral  part,  and  is  often  referred 
to  as  the  true  perineum  ;  the  posterior  division  is  called  the  anal  part,  or  the  false 
perineum. 

The  several  muscles  and  fasciae,  vessels  and  nerves,  which  enter  into  the 
formation  of  the  perineum  have  been  fully  described  in  the  second  and  third  volumes 
of  this  work,  and  it  now  only  remains  to  give  a  short  sketch  of  its  superficial 
and  topographical  anatomy,  with  which  may  be  included  also  the  relations  of 
the  adjoining  parts  of  the  pelvic  viscera. 

Superficial  anatomy. — The  osseous  portions  of  the  boundaries  of  the 
perineum  can  be  felt  more  or  less  distinctly  through  the  skin,  but  the  anterior 
portion  of  the  subpubic  arch  is  obscured  by  the  presence  of  the  penis,  and  the  ischial 
tuberosities  are  at  some  distance  from  the  surface,  being  covered  by  a  thick  layer  of 
fat  and,  in  the  erect  position,  also  by  the  great  gluteal  muscles.  The  sacro-sciatic 
ligament  is  scarcely  to  be  distinguished  beneath  the  gluteus  maximus,  except  in 
very  thin  subjects.  The  lower  part  of  the  coccyx  is  very  plainly  felt.  The  anus  is 
placed  directly  between  the  ischial  tuberosities,  its  centre  being  about  one  inch  and 
a  half  from  the  extremity  of  the  coccyx. 

The  skin  of  the  perineum  is  thin  and  provided  with  more  or  less  abundant 
hairs  ;  it  is  gathered  into  puckered  folds  round  the  anus,  to  which  a  farther 
irregularity  is  often  given  by  swollen  haemorrhoidal  veins.  In  front  of  the  anus  is  a 
median  ridge,  the  raphe,  which  runs  forwards  and  is  continued  on  to  the  scrotum 
and  penis.  Beneath  this,  the  bulb  of  the  urethra  forms  a  slight  median  elevation, 
more  perceptible  in  emaciated  subjects.  In  such  subjects,  again,  the  fat  in  the 
ischio-rectal  fossa  does  not  reach  the  level  of  the  ischial  tuberosities  so  as  to  form  a 
rounded  surface  sinking  in  towards  the  anus,  as  is  the  case  in  those  who  are  well 
nourished.  A  fine  white  line  round  the  anus  indicates  the  point  of  junction  of  the 
skin  and  mucous  membrane,  and  corresponds  precisely  to  the  division  between  the 
external  and  internal  sphincters  (Hilton). 

One  inch  (2'5  cm.)  in  front  of  the  anus  is  situated  the  central  point  of  the 
perineum,  which  corresponds  to  the  centre  of  the  free  border  of  the  triangular 
ligament.  Immediately  in  front  of  this,  the  bulb  of  the  urethra  commences,  but 
the  membranous  part  perforates  the  triangular  ligament  about  half  an  inch  farther 
forwards,  and  therefore  one  inch  and  a  half  (4  cm.)  in  front  of  the  anus. 

Topographical  anatomy. — The  superficial  fascia  of  the  perineum  consists  of 


THE   ISCHIO-KECTAL   FOSSA. 


two  layers,  the  more  superficial  of  which  is  the  ordinary  subcutaneous  fascia,  and 
contains  fat,  especially  in  the  posterior  portion  of  the  space,  where  it  is  very 
abundant  and  fills  the  ischio-rectal  fossa.  The  deep  layer  or  fascia  of  Colles  is 
membranous,  and  is  confined  to  the  anterior  part  of  the  space  ;  it  is  attached  on 
each  side  to  the  rami  of  the  ischium  and  pubis,  and  posteriorly  to  the  base  of  the 
triangular  ligament  ;  it  thus  forms  a  somewhat  triangular  pouch  in  the  fore  part  of 
the  perineum,  which  may  modify  the  course  of  an  extravasation  of  urine  or  a 
collection  of  pus  in  this  situation.  The  pouch  is,  moreover,  subdivided  posteriorly 
by  a  median  septum,  which  extends  from  the  back  of  the  perineum  to  the  scrotum. 
The  hinder  part  of  the  perineum  is  occupied  in  the  centre  by  the  lower  end  of 
the  rectum,  and  between  this  and 
the  ischial  tuberosity  on  each 
side  is  a  considerable  hollow 
known  as  the  ischio-rectal  fossa. 


FIG.  29. — DISSECTION  OF  THE  PERINEUM 
IN  THE  MALE.    (Allen  Thomson. )    ^ 

The  right  side  shows  a  superficial,  the 
left  a  deeper  view. 

a,  anus,  with  a  part  of  the  integu- 
ment surrounding  it ;  b,  left  half  of  the 
bulb  of  the  corpus  spongiosum,  exposed 
by  the  removal  of  the  bulbo-cavernosus 
muscle  ;  c,  coccyx  ;  d,  right  ischial  tube- 
rosity ;  e,  e,  superficial  perineal  fascia  ; 
/,  fat  occupying  the  right  ischio-recta! 
fossa ;  g,  gluteus  maximus  muscle  ;  1, 
on  the  right  transversus  perinei  muscle, 
points  to  the  superficial  per ineal' artery 
as  it  emerges  in  front  (in  this  case)  of 
the  muscle  ;  1',  on  the  left  side,  on  the 
.  surface  of  the  triangular  ligament,  points 
to  the  superficial  perinea]  artery  cut 
short ;  2,  on  the  right  ischio-cavernosus 
muscle,  points  to  the  superficial  perineal 
artery  and  nerves  passing  forwards  ;  2', 
on  the  left  side,  the  same  vessel  and 
nerves  divided  ;  3,  on  the  right  half  of 
the  triangular  ligament,  points  to  the 
transverse  perineal  artery  ;  4,  on  the  left 
ischial  tuberosity,  points  to  the  pudic 
artery  deep  in  the  iscbio-rectal  fossa  ; 
5.  5',  inferior  haemorrhoidal  branches  of 
the  pudic  arteries  and  nerves  ;  6,  on  the 
left  side,  placed  in  a  recess  from  which 
the  inferior  layer  of  the  triangular  liga- 
ment has  been  removed,  in  order  to  show 
the  continuation  of  the  pudic  artery,  its 
branch  to  the  bulb,  and  Cowper's  gland. 

The  ischio-rectaltfossa  is  a  hollow  of  an  irregularly  pyramidal  shape.  Its 
base  is  turned  downwards,  and  measures  about  two  inches  (5  cm.)  from  before 
back,  and  one  inch  (2'5  cm.)  from  side  to  side.  Its  outer  wall  is  nearly  perpen- 
dicular, and  is  formed  by  the  obturator  internus  muscle  covered  by  its  fascia  below 
the  level  at  which  the  rectovesical  fascia  is  attached  to  it.  The  inner  wall  is 
oblique  in  direction  and  convex  towards  the  fossa  ;  it  is  formed  by  the  levator  ani 
muscle,  covered  by  the  thin  anal  fascia,  and  at  the  lower  part  by  the  external 
sphincter.  Anteriorly,  the  fossa  is  limited  by  the  base  of  the  triangular  ligament, 
and  posteriorly  by  the  gluteus  maximus  muscle  and  the  great  sacro-sciatic  ligament. 
Its  depth  is  about  two  inches  (5  cm.)  from  the  margin  of  the  tuberosity  at  the  hinder 
part,  where  it  extends  upwards  to  the  ischial  spine,  the  small  sacro-sciatic  ligament 
nnd  the  coccygeus  muscle. 


64  THE    PERINEUM    OF   THE   MALE. 

The  pudic  vessels  and  the  dorsal  and  perineal  divisions  of  the  pudic  nerve  run 
forwards  along  the  outer  wall  of  the  fossa,  being  embedded  in  the  obturator  fascia 
about  an  inch  and  a  half  (3'5  cm.)  above  the  lower  margin  of  the  ischial  tuberosity ;  the 
inferior  hsemorrhoidal  branches  of  these  trunks  run  obliquely  inwards  and  forwards 
from  the  hinder  part  of  the  fossa  towards  the  anus  ;  and  anteriorly  the  superficial 
perineal  vessels  and  the  perineal  nerve  leave  the  shelter  of  the  hip-bone  and  also 
enter  the  fat  of  the  fossa. 

The  ischio-rectal  fossa  is  often  the  seat  of  abscesses  which  burrow  freely  in  the 
loose  fat  of  the  part,  and  frequently  result  in  the  formation  of  a  fistula  in  ano, 
involving  a  communication  with  the  bowel,  sometimes  above,  but  more  frequently 
below,  the  external  sphincter. 

The  lower  dilated  part  of  the  rectum,  which  occupies  the  space  between  the  two 
ischio-rectal  fossae,  is  supported  by  the  levatores  ani  and  the  external  sphincter 
muscles,  as  well  as  by  the  recto-vesical  fascia.  Its  lateral  wall  is  exposed  for 
a  distance  of  about  three  inches  (7'5  cm.),  its  posterior  wall  for  little  more  than  an 
inch  (3  cm.). 

On  removing  the  fasciae  of  the  fore  part  of  the  perineum  the  bulbo-cavernosus 
muscle  is  exposed  covering  the  corpus  spongiosum,  the  ischio-cavernosus  covering  the 
cms  penis  on  each  side,  and  the  transversus  perinei  directed  inwards  over  the  base 
of  the  triangular  ligament  to  meet  the  first-named  muscle,  as  well  as  the  external 
sphincter  and  its  fellow  of  the  opposite  side,  in  the  central  point  of  the  perineum. 
Between  the  bulbo-cavernosus,  ischio-cavernosus,  and  transversus  muscles  is  a  small 
triangular  space,  in  which  a  portion  of  the  triangular  ligament  is  exposed,  and  over 
the  surface  of  the  muscles  (sometimes  in  part  beneath  or  through  the  transversus) 
the  superficial  perineal  vessels  and  nerves  run  forwards  to  the  scrotum,  while  the 
small  transverse  perineal  artery  is  directed  inwards  close  to  the  transverse  muscle 
towards  the  central  point  of  the  perineum. 

The  triangular  ligament  or  deep  perineal  fascia,  which  occupies  the  subpubic 
arch,  has  a  depth  of  an  inch  and  a  half  in  the  middle  line,  but  extends  somewhat 
farther  backwards  on  each  side,  at  its  attachment  to  the  ischial  ramus.  It  consists 
of  two  layers,  the  upper  of  which  is  continuous  with  the  recto-vesical  fascia.  The 
membranous  part  of  the  urethra  descends,  first  through  the  superior,  and  then 
through  the  inferior  layer,  about  an  inch  from  the  pubic  symphysis,  and  it  is 
surrounded  by  the  fibres  of  the  constrictor  urethras  muscle,  which  occupies  the 
greater  part  of  the  space  between  the  two  layers.  Near  the  urethra,  also  embedded 
in  the  muscular  fibres,  is  Cowper's  gland.  The  pudic  vessels  and  the  dorsal  nerve 
of  the  penis  enter  the  base  of  the  triangular  ligament  and  run  forwards  close  to  the 
bone,  in  small  canals  formed  in  the  origin  of  the  constrictor  muscle,  and  the  artery 
gives  off  here  its  considerable  branch  to  the  bulb,  which  is  directed  inwards  about 
half  an  inch  (1  cm.)  from  the  base  of  the  triangular  ligament,  and  an  inch  and  a 
half  (3'5  cm.)  in  front  of  the  anus. 

Resting  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  triangular  ligament  is  the  apex  of  the 
prostate,  and  this  body  is  surrounded  by  its  sheath,  which  is  continuous  on  each 
side  with  the  upper  layer  of  the  ligament  ;  beneath  the  sheath  is  the  large  prostatic 
plexus  of  veins,  derived  mainly  from  the  breaking  up  of  the  dorsal  vein  of  the  penis, 
which  passes  into  the  pelvis  between  the  pubic  symphysis  and  the  triangular  liga- 
ment. In  the  recess  between  the  lateral  part  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  triangular 
ligament  and  the  sheath  of  the  prostate,  the  anterior  part  of  the  levator  ani  muscle 
is  lodged. 

Above  the  prostate,  and  at  a  depth  generally  of  from  two  and  a  half  to  three 
inches  (6 — 7  cm.)  from  the  surface,  is  the  bladder,  the  base  of  which  projects  back- 
wards into  the  concavity  formed  by  the  rectum  and  overlaps  the  second  part  of 


RECTAL    EXAMINATION.  65 

the  bowel  to  a  variable  extent,  according  to  the  degree  of  distension  of  the  bladder. 
Between  the  bladder  and  rectum  are  the  vesiculse  seminales  and  the  terminal  por- 
tions of  the  vasa  deferentia.  When  the  bladder  is  full,  the  recto- vesical  pouch  of 
the  peritoneum  does  not  usually  reach  below  a  line  an  inch  and  a  half  from  the  base 
of  the  prostate. 

In  contact  with  the  upper  surface  of  the  levator  ani  is  the  recto-vesical  fascia, 
forming  the  deep  boundary  of  the  perineal  space.  It  extends  from  the  side  wall  of 
the  pelvis  downwards  and  inwards  to  the  side  of  the  rectum,  to  the  bladder  and 
prostate.  Its  line  of  attachment  to  the  bladder  on  each  side  runs  upwards  and 
backwards  immediately  above  the  prostate,  and  external  to  the  position  of  the 
vesiculse  seminales  ;  and  it  is  essential,  in  the  operation  of  lateral  lithotomy,  that 
the  bladder  be  opened  entirely  below  this  level.  If  the  incision  be  carried  through 
the  fascia  beyond  this  line,  then  the  pelvic  cavity  will  be  opened,  and  extravasation 
of  urine  into  the  loose  areolar  tissue  will  probably  follow. 

EXAMINATION     OF     THE     PELVIC     VISCERA. 

Rectal  examination  in  the  male. — On  passing  the  finger  into  the  rectum 
in  the  adult  male,  the  constriction  (anal  canal)  caused  by  the  internal  and  external 
sphincters  is  first  encountered,  the  internal  sphincter  extending  one  inch  above  the 
anal  orifice.  The  soft  mucous  membrane  of  the  bowel  is  then  felt  more  or  less 
doubled  into  transverse  folds  (folds  of  Houston,  plicce,  transversaks  recti)  :  these 
are  usually  three  in  number,  the  largest  being  found  on  the  front  and  right  side  of 
the  bowel  about  three  inches  from  the  anus,  and  on  a  level  with  the  extremity  of  the 
recto-vesical  pouch  of  peritoneum,  while  another  is  placed  on  the  left  side  about  one 
inch  higher  ;  and  the  third,  which  is  less  constant,  is  on  the  left  side,  posteriorly, 
below  the  first.  These  folds  are  visible  when  the  rectum  is  examined  with  the  aid 
of  a  speculum,  the  body  being  placed  in  the  genu-pectoral  position.  They  some- 
times render  the  introduction  of  the  finger  or  an  instrument  beyond  a  certain  point 
difficult  or  impossible.  The  columns  of  Morgagni  (column®  rectales]  and  the  small 
folds  of  mucous  membrane  (valves  of  Morgagni)  directed  upwards  which  join  them, 
with  the  enclosed  recesses  (sinus  rectales],  are  not  to  be  felt,  but  are  easily  seen  with 
a  speculum.  The  mucous  membrane  of  the  anal  canal  is  thicker  and  drier  than  the 
velvety  lining  membrane  of  the  bowel  higher  up.  It  often  presents  small  polypoid 
projections  from  its  surface. 

Through  the  wall  of  the  bowel  numerous  objects  may  be  felt  : — In  front  is  the 
base  of  the  triangular  ligament,  a  little  distance  above  which  is  the  apex  of  the 
prostate.  The  outline  of  the  prostate  is  readily  made  out,  and  above  it  the  bladder 
may  be  felt  if  distended.  The  vesiculae  seminales  are  not  to  be  recognized  unless 
enlarged,  and  even  then  only  their  lower  parts  by  a  finger  of  average  length. 

Behind,  after  passing  over  the  soft  posterior  part  of  the  perineum  (ano-coccygeal 
body),  the  tip  of  the  coccyx  is  reached  and  the  finger  explores  the  hollow  of  the 
sacrum.  From  this  there  passes  out  on  each  side  a  resistent  band  consisting  of  the 
small  sacro-sciatic  ligament  and  the  coccygeus  muscle,  which  lead  to  the  ischial 
spine. 

On  each  side,  the  ischial  tuberosity  and  the  wall  of  the  true  pelvis  are  felt,  and 
in  this  way  the  condition  of  the  structures  at  the  back  of  the  acetabulum,  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  the  caecum,  or  of  the  large  vessels  may  be  determined. 

This  examination  of  the  pelvis  is  easier  in  the  infant,  and  is  aided  by  bimanual 
examination,  one  hand  being  placed  on  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen.  In  the 
infant  the  parts  felt  are  the  same,  except  that  the  prostate  is  scarcely 
perceptible. 

Rectal   examination   in    the  female. — In  the  female  the  anus   is   placed 


66  EXAMINATION    OF    THE    PELVIC    VISCERA. 

slightly  farther  forwards  than  in  the  male,  and  is  not  so  deeply  sunk  between  the 
nates  ;  the  surrounding  skin  is  usually  destitute  of  hairs.  Behind  the  rectum  the 
parts  to  be  felt  are  the  same  as  in  the  other  sex.  In  front,  above  the  perineal  body, 
the  first  part  met  with  is  the  soft  recto-vaginal  septum  ;  then  the  cervix  and  os 
uteri,  and  higher  up  the  lower  part  of  the  body  of  the  uterus.  Any  abnormality  in 
the  position  of  the  organ  or  in  the  state  of  the  pouch  of  Douglas  can  also  be 
determined.  At  each  side,  besides  the  structures  met  with  in  the  male,  the 
resistance  caused  by  the  base  of  the  broad  ligament  may  be  detected,  the  ovaries 
may  be  felt  on  bimanual  examination,  and  the  outline  of  the  uterus  more  accurately 
determined. 

Vaginal  examination. — In  a  digital  examination  of  the  vagina,  the  passage 
is  found  to  be  small,  and  more  or  less  obstructed  by  the  hymen  in  the  virgin,  and 
the  mucous  membrane  is  rugose.  In  a  woman  who  has  borne  children  the  parts  are 
more  capacious,  there  is  no  hymen,  and  the  rugae  are  no  longer  felt.  The  outline 
of  the  subpubic  arch  may  be  traced  in  front,  and  the  region  of  the  bladder  explored  ; 
behind  is  the  soft  recto-vaginal  septum  ;  and  on  each  side  the  pelvic  wall  may  be 
examined,  and  the  ovaries  can  easily  be  felt  on  bimanual  examination.  At  the 
upper  end  of  the  vagina,  and  projecting  from  the  anterior  wall,  is  the  cervix  uteri, 
in  which  the  os  is  to  be  felt  as  a  transverse  slit. 


INDEX  TO  APPENDIX. 


ABDOMEN,  superficial  anatomy  of,  22 
Abdominal  aorta,  27,  34 

cavity,  22 

furrow,  24 

regions,  22 
lateral,  23 
viscera  of,  23 

ring,  external,  24,  51,  55,  56 
internal,  24,  51,  53 

vessels,  27 

viscera,  23,  24 

wall,  23,  56 

Abductor.     See  MUSCLES. 
Acetabulum,  43,  65 
Acromial  angle,  28 
Acromio-clavicular  articulation,  32 
Acromion,  28,  32,  35 
Adductor.     See  MUSCLES. 

tubercle,  45,  46 
Aditus  ad  antrurn,  10 
Alveolar  processes,  15 
Alveolo-lingual  sulcus,  15 
Anal  canal,  65 

fascia,  63 

part  of  perineum,  62 
Anastomotic  artery  of  thigh,  46 
Anatomy,  superficial.     See  SUPERFICIAL  ANA- 
TOMY. 

topographical.     See  TOPOGRAPHICAL  ANA- 
TOMY. 

Anconeus  muscle,  37,  38 
Angle,  acromial,  28 

of  jaw,  14,  32 

Rolandic,  9 

of  scapula,  28,  32,  33 

sternal,  19 

subcostal,  19 

Angular  process,  external,  I 
Ankle,  superficial  anatomy  of,  48 
Ankle-joint,  48 
Annular  ligament,  anterior,  49 
Annulus  femoralis,  60 
Ano-coccygeal  body,  65 
Antrum,  mastoid,  10,  n,  13 
Anus,  60,  65 
Aorta,  abdominal,  27,  34 

arch  of,  22,  29,  33 

ascending,  22,  33 

descending,  29,  33 
Aortic  cartilage,  22 

orifice,  22,  33 

Aperture  of  larynx,  upper,  17,  32 
Aperture,  nasal,  anterior,  13 
Apex  of  bladder,  53 

of  heart,  2 1 

of  lung,  20,  28,  32 

of  prostate,  64,  65 

Aponeurosis  of  external  oblique  muscle,  51,  56 
Appendix,  vermiform,  23 


Arch  of  aorta,  22,  29,  33 
azygos  vein,  33 
femoral,  deep,  58,  60 
superficial,  57,  60 
palmar,  deep,  41 

superficial,  41 
of  subclavian  artery,  32 
subpubic,  62,  66 
of  thoracic  duct,  32 
Arm,  superficial  anatomy  of,  35 
ARTERY  or  ARTERIES,  aberrant  obturator,  60 
anastomotic  of  thigh,  46 
articular  of  knee,  46 
axillary,  35 
brachial,  36,  37,  39 
of  bulb,  64 

carotid,  common,  17,  22,  32 
external,  17 
internal,  17 
cervical,  transverse,  18 
circumflex,  posterior,  35 
crico-thyroid,  17 
coronary,  of  facial,  14 
digital  of  hand.  41 
dorsal  of  foot,  49 
endocranial,  3 

epigastric,  24,  51,  53,  54,  55,  60 
facial,  14,  17 
femoral,  43,  45,  57,  60 
frontal,  3 
gluteal,  43 
hypogastric,  51,  56 
iliac,  common,  27,  34 

external,  27,  51,  57,  58 
innominate,  17,  22,  32,  33 
intercostal,  22 
lateral  costal,  22 
lingual,  17 

mammary,  internal,  22 
meningeal,  middle,  5 
mesenteric,  superior,  27,  34 

inferior,  27,  34 
occipital,  3,  10,  17 
perineal  superficial,  64 

transverse,  64 
plantar,  48,  49 
popliteal,  46,  47 
prof'unda  of  thigh,  45 

superior,  37 
pubic,  of  epigastric,  60 
pudic,  64 
pulmonary,  33 
radial,  38,  39 
renal,  27,  29,  34 
of  scalp,  3 
sciatic,  43 

spermatic,  54,  56,  60 
subclavian,  18.  22,  32 
superficial  volar,  41 

F  2 


68 


INDEX   TO    APPENDIX. 


ARTERY  or  ARTERIES — continued. 

supraorbital,  3 

temporal,  superficial,  3 

of  thoracic  wall,  22 

thyroid,  inferior,  17 
superior,  17 

tibial,  47,  48,  49 

transverse  facial,  14 

ulnar,  38,  39 

vertebral,  17 

Articular  arteries  of  knee,  46 
ARTICULATION    or    ARTICULATIONS,    acromio- 
clavicular,  32 

of  ankle,  48 

chondro -sternal,  20,  21,  22,  24,  25,  33 

of  elbow,  37 

of  hip,  43 

interphalangeal,  41 

of  knee,  45 

metacarpo-phalangeal,  40,  41 

metatarso-phalangeal,  49 

radio-carpal,  41 

sacro- iliac,  42 

of  shoulder,  35 

sterno-clavicular,  18,  22 

tarsal,  transverse,  48 

tarso-metatarsal,  48 

temporo-maxillary,  13 

xiphisternal,  19,  24,  25,  33 
Astragalus,  48 
Atlas,  1 6,  31 
Attic  of  tympanum,  10 
Auditory  meatus,  external,  II,  12 
Auricles  of  heart,  33 
Auricular  nerve,  great,  18 
Auriculo-ventricular  openings,  22,  33 
Axilla,  folds  of,  19,  35 
Axillary  artery,  35 
Axis,  16,  27,  31 

cceliac,  27,  29,  34 
Azygos  vein,  33 


BACK,  superficial  anatomy  of,  27 
Basal  ganglia,  9 
Base  of  bladder,  64 
of jaw,  14 
line  of  Reid,  7 
Basilar  process,  16 
Basilic  vein,  36,  37 
Bend  of  elbow,  37 
Biceps.     See  MUSCLES. 
Bicipital  fascia,  37,  38 

furrows,  35 

Bifurcation  of  aorta,  27,  29,  34 
brachial  artery,  39 
common  carotid  artery,  32 
common  iliac  artery,  34 
innominate  artery,  32 
popliteal  artery,  47 
posterior  tibial  artery,  48 
trachea,  33 
Bi-iliac  line,  22 

plane,  23,  34 

Bladder,  23,  25,  53,  64,  65,  66 
Blood-vessels.     See  ARTERIES,  VEINS, 
Body,  ano-coccygeal,  65 
thyroid,  17 
turbinate,  13,  16 
Brachial  artery,  36,  37,  39 
plexus,  1 8 


Brachialis  anticus  muscle,  36 
Broad  ligament  of  uterus,  66 
Bronchi,  28,  33 
Bulb,  artery  of,  64 

of  urethra,  62 

Bulbo-cavernosus  muscle,  64 
Bursa,  over  olecranon,  37 
patella,  46 

pharyngea,  16 

over  tubercle  of  tibia,  46 
Buttock,  42 


CAECUM,  23,  25,  65 
Calf,  47 
Canal,  anal,  65 

crural,  60 

of  facial  nerve,  1 2 

femoral,  51,  60,  61 

inguinal,  24,  51,  54,  55,  56 

of  Nuck,  55 

palatine,  posterior,  16 

semicircular,  external,  12 
Canaliculi,  lachrymal,  15 
Canthus,  14 
Capitellum,  37 
Cardiac  dulness,  deep,  22 
superficial,  22 

orifice  of  stomach,  23,  25,  28,  33 
Carotid  artery.     See  ARTERIES. 

tubercle,  17 
Cartilage,  aortic,  22 

costal,  19,  20,  21,  22,  24,  25,  26,  33,  34 

cricoid,  16,  17,  32 

of  nose,  13 

pulmonary,  22 

of  septum  nasi,  13 

thyroid,  16,  32 
Caruncula  lacrim'alis,  15 
Central  point  of  perineum,  62,  64 
Cephalic  vein,  36,  37 
Cerebellum,  10 
Cerebral,  convolutions,  relations  of,  to  cranium, 6 

fissures,  relations  of,  to  cranium,  6 
determination  of,  7 

hemispheres,  5 
Cervical  enlargement  of  spinal  cord,  31 

vertebrae,  16,  27 
Cervix  uteri,  66 

Chest,  superficial  anatomy  of,  19 
Chondro-sternal  articulations,  20,  21,  22,  24,  25, 

33 

Circumflex  artery  and  nerve,  35 

Clavicle,  17,  18,  32,  35 

Clavicular  head  of  sterno-mastoid  muscle,  17 

Coccygeus  muscle,  63,  65 

Coccyx,  62,  65 

Coeliac  axis,  27,  29,  34 

Colles,  fascia  of,  63 

Colon,  23,  25,  31 

Columnse  rectales,  65 

Columns  of  Morgagni,  65 

Compartments,  of  femoral  sheath,  60 

iliac,  58 

pectineal,  59 

vascular,  58 
Condyles  of  femur,  45,  46 

humerus,  35,  36,  37 
Congenital  hernia,  54,  55 
Conjoined  tendon,  51,  56)  60 
Conjunctiva,  15 
Constrictor  urethra  muscle,  64 


INDEX    TO    APPENDIX. 


69 


Convolutions,  cerebral,  relations  of,  to  cranium,  6 
Cooper,  ligament  of,  59 
Coraco-brachialis  muscle,  35 
Coracoid  process,  35 
Cord,  spermatic,  43,  51,  54,  56 
coverings  of,  51,  54 

spinal,  31,  34 
Cornua  of  falciform  border,  60 

of  hyoid  bone,  17 

of  lateral  ventricle,  9 
Coronary  branch  of  facial  artery,  1 4 
Corpus  spongiosum,  64 
Costal  artery,  lateral,  22 

cartilages,  19,  20,  21,  22,  24,   25,  26,   33, 

34 

Coverings  of  spermatic  cord,  51,  54 
direct  inguinal  hernia,  56 
femoral  hernia,  61 
oblique  inguinal  hernia,  54 
Cowper's  gland,  64 
Cranio-cerebral  topography,  5 
Cranium,  i 

relations  of  cerebrum  to,  6 
Cremaster  muscle,  51,  55,  56 
Cremasteric  fascia,  51 
Crest,  external  occipital,  i 

iliac,  22,  23,  28,  30,  34,  42 

pubic,  43 

temporal,  i,  7,  9 

supramastoid,  n,  12,  13 
Cribriform  fascia,  60,  61 
Cricoid  cartilage,  16,  17,  32 
Crico-thyroid  artery,  1 7 

space,  1 6,  17 
Crural  branch  of  genito-crural  nerve,  58 

canal,  60 

nerve,  anterior,  45,  59 

ring,  60 

sheath,  60 
Crus  penis,  64 
Cuneiform  bones.  48 
Curved  line,  superior,  i 


DELTOID  muscle,  35 
Diaphragm,  33 
Digastric  muscle,  16 
Digital  arteries  of  hand,  41 
Direct  inguinal  hernia,  54,  55 
Dorsal  artery  of  foot,  49 

nerve  of  penis,  64 

vein  of  penis,  64 
Dorso-lumbar  furrow,  27 
Douglas,  pouch  of,  66 
Duct,  nasal,  15 

ofStensen,  14,  15 

of  Wharton,  15 

thoracic,  arch  of,  32 
Dulness,  cardiac,  deep,  22 

superficial,  22 

Duodeno-jejunal  flexure,  23,  25,  34 
Duodenum,  23,  27,  31,  34 


ELBOW,  superficial  anatomy  of,  37 
Eminence,  frontal,  i 

hypothenar,  39 

parietal,  I,  6,  7 

thenar,  39 
Endocranial  blood-vessels,  3 


Ensiform  process,  19,  33 

Epigastric  artery,  24,  51,  53,  54,  55,  60 

fossa,  19 

region,  23 

vein,  superficial,  24 
Epiglottis,  1 6,  17,  32 
Epiphysis,  lower,  of  femur,  46 
Epitympanic  recess,  10 
Erector  spinse  muscles,  27,  28 
External  inguinal  hernia,  54 
Extensor.     See  MUSCLES. 
Eustachian  tube,  16 
Eyeball,  14 
Eyelid,  14 


FACE,  superficial  anatomy  of,  I,  13 
Facial  arteiy,  14,  17 

transverse,  14 

nerve,  14 

canal  of,  12 

vein,  17 

Falciform  border,  60 
False  perineum,  62 
Falx  inguinalis,  56 
Fascia,  anal,  63 

bicipital,  37,  38 

of  Colles,  63 

cremasteric,  51 

cribriform,  60,  61 

cribrosa,  60 

iliac,  58,  59,  60 

infundibuliform,  51 

intercolumnar,  51 

lata,  45,  59 

obturator,  63,  64 

palmar,  39 

pectineal,  58,  59,  60 

of  perineum,  deep,  63,  64 
superficial,  62 

propria,  61 

recto-vesical,  62,  64,  65 

spermatic,  51,  56 

transversalis,  51,  56,  58,  60 

triangular,  51 
Fauces,  15 

pillars  of,  16 

Femoral  arch,  deep,  58,  60 
superficial,  57,  60 

artery,  43,  45.  ,57,  60 

canal,  5i>  6o>  61 

glands,  43 

hernia,  43,  51,  57,  61 

ligament,  61 

ring,  54,  58,  60 

septum,  60 

sheath,  57,  58,  60,  61 

vein,  45,  57,  60 
Femur,  45,  46 
Fibula,  46,  47 
Fingers,  flexures  of,  41 
Fissure  or  Fissures,  cerebral,  situation  of,  6 

intraparietal,  7,  9 

of  lung,  20 

palpebral,  14 

parallel,  7,  9 

parieto-occipital,  6 

petro-squamosal,  n 

of  Rolando,  6,  7,  8 

of  Sylvius,  6,  8 
Flexor.    'See  MUSCLES. 


70 


INDEX    TO    APPENDIX. 


Flexure,  duodeno-jejanal,  23,  25,  34 

hepatic,  23,  25,  34 

splenic,  23,  25,  34 
Flexures  of  palm,  40 

fingers,  41 
Floor  of  mouth,  15 
Fold  or  Folds,  of  axilla,  19,  35 

of  Houston,  65 

of  nates,  42 

peritoneal,  51 

salpingo-palatine,  1 6 

salpingo-pharyngeal,  16 
Fontanelles,  I,  2 
Foot,  superficial  anatomy  of,  48 
Foramen,  infraorbital,  14 

mental,  14 

sacro-sciatic,  43 

supraorbital,  I 

of  Winslow,  34 

Forearm,  superficial  anatomy  of,  38 
Fossa  or  Fossa?,  epigastric,  19 

infraclavicular,  19,  35 

infracostal,  24 

ischio-rectal,  62,  63 

jugularis,  17 

middle  of  skull,  n,  13 

nasal,  13,  16 

ovalis,  60 

peritoneal,  51,  54,  60 

posterior,  of  skull,  13 

of  Rosenmuller,  16 

supraclavicular,  18 

suprameatal.   12 
Fovea  supravesicalis,  53,  56 

femoralis,  54,  60 

inguinalis  lateralis,  53 

mesialis,  53,  56 
Fraiium  lingua?,  15 

of  lips,  15 
Frontal  artery,  3 

convolutions,  7 

eminence,  I,  7 

lobe  of  cerebrum,  7 

margin  of  cerebrum,  5 

sinuses,  2 

sulci,  7,  9 

vein,  3 

Fron to-malar  suture,  I,  7 
Fundus  of  stomach,  25,  33 
Furrow,  abdominal,  24 

bicipital,  35 

dorso-lumbar,  27 

iliac,  42 

inguinal,  22,  43 

nuchal,  i,  27 

spinal,  27 

sternal,  19 


GALL-BLADDER,  23,  24 

Ganglia,  basal,  9 

Gastrocnemius  muscle,  47 

Geuito-crural  nerve,  58 

Genu,  inferior,  of  Rolandic  fissure,  9 

Gimbernat's  ligament,  51,  57,  58,  59,  60,  61 

Glabella,  3 

Gland  or  Glands,  of  Cowper,  64 

femoral,  43 

inguinal,  24,  43 

Meibomian,  15 

parotid,  14 


Gland  or  Glands — continued. 

popliteal,  47 

sublingual,  15 

submaxillary,  16 
Glenoid  cavity,  33,  35 
Gluteal  artery,  43 

region,  42 

Gluteus.  See  MUSCLES. 
Gracilis  muscle,  46 
Groin,  23,  51,  57 
Groove,  sternal,  19 
Gums,  15 

HAM,  46 

•Hamstring  muscles,  45,  46 

Hamular  process,  16 

Hand,  superficial  anatomy  of,  39 

Hard  palate,  16 

Head  of  astragalus,  48 

clavicular,  of  sterno-mastoid,  17 
of  femur,  45 

fibula,  46,  47 
gastrocnemius  muscle,  47 
humerus,  35 
metatarsal  bones,  48,  49 
pancreas,  34 
radius,  37,  38 

sternal  of  sterno-mastoid,  17 
superficial  anatomy  of,  i 
of  triceps  muscle,  37 
of  ulna,  38 
Heart,  21,  23,  33 
Hemisphere,  cerebral,  5 
Henle,  ligament  of,  56 
Hepatic  flexure,  23,  25,  34 
Hernia,  51 

femoral,  43,  51,  57,  61 
infantile,  54 
inguinal,  51,  54 

congenital,  54,  55 
direct,  54,  55,  56 
external,  54 
internal,  54,  55,  56 
oblique,  54 

internal,  56 
sac  of,  54,  6 1 
Hesselbach,  ligament  of,  56 

triangle  of,  55,  56 
Key's  ligament,  61 
Hip,  superficial  anatomy  of,  42 
Hip-joint,  43 

Hook  of  unciform  bone,  39 
Houston,  folds  of,  65 
Humerus,  35 
Hymen,  66 
Hyoid  bone,  16,  32 
Hyo-mental  region,  16 
Hyo-sternal  region,  16 
Hypochondriac  region,  23 
Hypogastric  artery,  51,  56 

region,  23 

Hypoglossal  nerve,  17 
Hypothenar  eminence,  39 


ILEUM,  23,  25 

Iliac  artery.     Sec  ARTERIES. 

compartment,  58 

crest,  22,  23,  28,  30,  34,  42 

fascia,  58,  59,  60 

furrow,  42 

part  of  fascia  lata,  60 


INDEX    TO    APPENDIX. 


71 


Iliac  region,  23 

spine,  anterior  superior,  23,  34,  42,  43,  51, 

57,  61 
posterior  inferior,  43 

superior,  27,  42,  43 
vein,  external,  54,  57,  58,  60 
Ilio-pectineal  intermuscular  septum,  59 
Ilio-psoas  muscle,  57,  59 
Ilio-tibial  band,  45,  46 
Ilium,  59 

Infantile  hernia,  54 
Infraclavicular  fossa,  19,  35 
Infracostal  fossa,  24 
line,  22 
plane,  23,  34 
Infrahyoid  region,  1 6 
Infraorbital  foramen,  14 
Infrapatellar  fat,  46 
Infraspinatus  muscle,  35 
Infrasternal  depression,  19 
Infundibuliform  fascia,  51 
Infundibulum  of  frontal  sinus,  3 

of  heart,  33 

Inguinal  canal,  24,  51,  54,  55,  56 
furrow,  22,  43 
glands,  24,  43 
hernia,  51,  54 

congenital,  54,  55 
direct,  54,  55 
external,  54 
internal,  54,  55 
oblique,  54 

internal,  56 
region,  23 
Inion,  7 
Innominate  artery,  17,  22,  32,  33 

vein,  22,  33 
Insula,  9 

Intercolumnar  fascia,  51 
Intercostal  spaces,  19,  21,  22,  28 

vessels,  22 

Intermetatarsal  spaces,  49 
Intermuscular  septum  of  arm,  external,  35,  37 

internal,  36 
ilio-pectineal,  59 
of  thigh,  external,  45 
Internal  inguinal  hernia.     See  HERNIA. 
Interosseous  nerve,  posterior,  37 
Interphalangeal  articulations,  41 
Intestines,  25 
Intraparietal  fissure,  7,  9 
Ischial  ramus,  43,  62,  63 
spine,  63,  65 
tuberosity,  43,  62,  65 
Ischio-cavernosus  muscle,  64 
Ischio-rectal  fossa,  62,  63 
Island  of  Reil,  9 
Isthmus,  thyroid,  17 

JAW,  lower,  14,  15,  32 
Jejunum,  23,  25 
Joint.      See  ARTICULATIONS. 
Jugular  veins.     See  VEINS. 

KIDNEY,  23,  26,  30,  31,  34 

Knee-joint,  45 

Knee,  superficial  anatomy  of,  45 

LABIUM  pudendi,  54 
Lachrymal  sac,  1 5 
Lacuna  musculoruni,  58 
vasorum,  58 


Lambda,  i,  6,  7 
Lambdoid  suture,  I 
Larynx,  17,  28,  32 

aperture  of,  17 

Lateral  abdominal  region,  23 
Lateral  sinus,  4,  10,  12 
Latissimus  dorsi  muscle,  19,  35 
Levator.     See  MUSCLES. 
Leg,  superficial  anatomy  of,  47 
Levels  of  structures  of  trunk,  32 
Ligament,  annular,  anterior,  of  ankle,  49 

broad,  of  uterus,  66 

of  Cooper,  59 

femoral,  61 

of  Gimbernat,  51,  57,  58,  59,  60,  6l 

of  Henle,  56 

of  Hesselbach,  56 

of  Hey,  6 1 

lateral,  external,  of  knee,  46 

pterygo-maxillary,  16 

of  Poupart,  22,  24,  43,  51,  55,  57,  58,  59, 
60,  6 1 

pubic,  59 

round,  of  uterus,  54,  55 

sacro-sciatic,  62,  63,  65 

tarsal,  internal,  15 

transverse,  superficial,  of  hand,  41 

triangular,  62,  63,  64,  65 
Ligamentum  inguinale.  57 

iuterfoveolare,  56 

lacunare,  57 

patellse,  46 
Limb,  lower,  superficial  anatomy  of,  42 

upper,  superficial  anatomy  of,  35 
Line  or  lines,  base,  of  Eeid,  7 

bi-iliac,  22 

infracostal,  22 

mid-Poupart,  23 

nasio-inial,  7 

of  Nelaton,  43 

of  palm,  40 

of  parallel  fissure,  7,  9 

Rolandic,  8 

Sylvian,  8 

Linea  semilunaris,  23,  24 
Lingual  artery,  17 

nerve,  16 
Lips,  15 

Liver,  23,  24,  33,  34 
Longitudinal  sinus,  superior,  3,  5 
Lumbar  enlargement  of  spinal  cord,  31 

region,  23 
Lung,  18,  20,  28,  32,  34 

root  of,  33 

MALLEOLUS,  external,  47,  48 

internal,  47,  48 
Mammary  artery,  internal,  22 
Manubrium,  19,  20,  22,  32,  33 
Marginal  tubercle,  7 
Masseter  muscle,  14,  15 
Mastoid  antrum,  10 

cells,  II,  12,  13 

process,  i 

Masto-squamosal  suture,  12 
Meatus,  external  auditory,  i  j ,   12 

middle,  of  nose,  13 
Median  nerve,  36,  38 

vein,  37,  38 
Median-basilic  vein,  37 
Median-cephalic  vein,  37 
Meibomian  glands.  15 


INDEX    TO    APPENDIX. 


Membranous  urethra,  62,  64 

Meningeal  artery,  middle,  5 

Mental  foramen,  14 

Mesenteric  artery.     Sec  ARTERY. 

Mesentery,  23,  25 

Metacarpal  bones,  39 

Metacarpo-phalangeal  articulations,  40,  41 

Metatarsal  bones,  48,  49 

Metatarso-phalangeal  articulations,  49 

Mid-Poupart  line,  23 

Morgagni,  columns  of,  65 

valves  of,  65 
Mouth,  15,  32 

MUSCLE  or  MUSCLES,  abductor  hallucis,  49 
indicis,  39 
minimi  digiti,  49 
adductor  longus,  45 
magnus,  45,  46 
of  thigh,  43,  45,  46 
transversus  pollicis,  39 
anconeus,  37,  38 
biceps  brachii,  35.  36,  37 

femoris,  45,  46,  47 
brachialis  anticus,  36 
bulbo-cavernosus,  64 
coccygeus,  63,  65 
constrictor  urethras,  64 
coraco-brachialis,  35 
cremaster,  51,  55,  56 
deltoid,  35 
digastric,  16 
erector  spinte,  27,  28 
extensor  brevis  digitorum,  49 
pollicis,  38,  39 
carpi  radialis,  36,  37,  38 

ulnaris,  38 

communis  digitorum,  39 
of  fingers,  38,  39 
of  forearm,  37 
indicis,  39 
longus  digitorum,  47,  49 

pollicis,  38,  39 
minimi  digiti,  38,  39 
ossis  metacarpi  pollicis,  38,  39 
proprius  hallucis,  47,  49 
of  thumb.  38,  39 
flexor  brevis  hallucis,  49 

minimi  digiti,  49 
carpi  radialis,  38 

ulnaris,  38 
longus  digitorum,  47 
profundus  digitorum,  38 
gastrocnemius,  47 
gluteus  maximus,  42,  43,  62,  63 
medius,  42,  43 
minimus,  42 
gracilis,  46 
hamstring,  45,  46 
ilio-psoas,  57,  59 
infraspinatus,  35 
ischio-cavernosus,  64 
latissimus  dorsi,  19,  35 
levator  anguli  scapulae,  28 

ani,  62,  63,  64,  65 
of  little  finger,  short,  39 
masseter,  14,  15 
obliquus  abdominis,  externus,    19,  24,  51, 

56 

internus,  51,  56 
obturator  internus,  63 
omo-hyoid,  17,  1 8 
palmaris  longus,  38 


'    MUSCLE  or  MUSCLES — continued. 

pectineus,  57,  59,  60 

pectoralis  major,  19,  35 
minor,  19 

peronei,  46,  47,  49 

quadriceps  extensor,  43 

rectus  abdominis,  19,  24,  55 
femoris,  43 

sartorius,  43,  46 

seiaimembranosus,  46 

semitendinosus,  46 

serratus  magnus,  19 

soleus,  47 

sphincter  ani,  62,  63,  64,  65 

sterno-mastoid,  17 

supinator  longus,  35,  36,  37,  38,  39 

supraspinatus,  28 

temporal,  I,  15 

tensor  vaginae  femoris,  42 

teres,  35 

of  thumb,  short,  39 

tibialis  anticus,  47,  48,  49 
posticus,  47,  48 

transversalis  abdominis.  51,  56 

transversus  perinei,  64 

trapezius,  28 

triceps,  35,  37 

vastus,  exteruus,  44,  45 

internus,  44 

Musculo-cutaneous  nerve,  49 
Musculo-spiral  nerve,  37 


NARES,  posterior,  16 
Nasal  aperture,  anterior,  13 

cartilages,  13 

duct,  15 

fossa,  13,  1 6 

spine,  anterior,  13 
Nasion,  7 
Nasio-inial  line,  7 
Naso-frontal  suture.  5 
Nates,  fold  of,  42 
Navicular  bone,  48 
Neck,  superficial  anatomy  of,  I,  1 6 
Nelaton's  line,  43 
NERVE  or  NERVES,  auricular,  great,  18 

circumflex,  35 

crural,  anterior,  45,  59 

cutaneous,  external,  59 

dorsal  of  penis,  64 

facial,  12,  14 

genito-crural,  58 

hypoglossal,  17 

interosseous,  posterior,  37 

lingual,  1 6 

median,  36,  38 

musculo-cutaneous,  49 

musculo-spiral,  37 

occipital,  great,  3 

perineal,  64 

popliteal,  47 

pudic,  64 

radial,  37 

saphenous,  external,  47,  49 
internal,  46,  47 

of  scalp,  3 

sciatic,  great,  43,  45 
small,  45 

spinal,  31,  32,  33,  34 

spinal  accessory,  18 

superficial  cervical,  18 


INDEX    TO    APPENDIX. 


73 


NERVE  or  NERVES — continued. 

supraorbital,  3 

supratrochlear,  3 

tibial,  anterior,  49 
posterior,  47 

ulnar,  36,  39 

Nerve-roots,  spinal,  31,  32,  33,  34 
Nipple,  19,  22,  33 
Notch,  supraorbital,  i,  14 

suprasternal,  17 
Nuchal  iurrow,  i,  27 
Nuck,  canal  of,  55 


OBELION,  i 

Oblique  inguinal  hernia,  54 

internal,  56 

Obliquus  abdomiuis.     See  MUSCLES. 
Obturator  artery,  aberrant,  60 

fascia,  63,  64 

internus  muscle,  63 
Occipital  artery,  3,  10,  17        ' 

crest,  external,  i 

nerve,  great,  3 

protuberance,  external,  I 
Occipito-temporal  margin  of  cerebrum,  5 
(Esophagus,  17,  28,  32 
Olecranon,  37 
Omentum,  great,  23,  25 
Omo-hyoid  muscle,  17,  1 8 
Operculum  of  middle  turbinate  body,  13 
Orifice,  aortic,  22,  23 

auriculo-ventricular,  22,  33 

cardiac,  23,  25,  28,  33 

of  inferior  vena  cava,  33 

pulmonary,  22,  33 

pyloric,  23,  25,  29,  34 
Origin  of  spinal  nerve-roots,  31,  32,  33,  34 
Os  calcis,  47,  48,  49 
Os  uteri,  66 
Ovary,  66 


PALATE,  16,  32 
Palatine  canal,  posterior,  16 
Palm,  39 

Palmar  arch,  deep,  41 
superficial,  41 

fascia,  39 

Palmaris  longus,  38 
Palpebral  fissure.  14 

sulcus,  external,  14 
inferior,  14 
superior,  14 

Palpebro-malar  sulcus,  14 
Pancreas,  23,  27,  31,  34 
Papilla  lacrimalis,  15 
Parallel  fissure,  7,  9 
Parietal  eminence,  i,  6,  7 
Parieto-occipital  fissure,  6 
Parotid  gland,  14 
Patella,  46 

ligament  of,  46 
Pectineal  compartment,  59 

fascia,  58,  59,  60 
Pectineus  muscle,  57,  59,  60 
Pectoral  muscles,  19,  35 
Pelvic  viscera,  examination  of,  65 
Penis,  crura  of,  64 
Perineal  artery.     See  ARTERY. 

fascia,  64 

nerve,  64 


Perineum,  central  point  of,  62,  64 

false,  62 

anatomy  of,  62 

true,  62 
Peritoneal  folds,  51 

fossae,  51,  54 

Peritoneum,  54,  56,  60,  6 1 
Peroneal  spine,  48 
Peronei  muscles,  46,  47,  49 
Petro-squamosal  fissure,  1 1 
Pharyngeal  recess,  lateral,  16 
median,  16 

tonsil,  1 6 

Pharynx,  13,  16,  17,  28,  32 
Pillars  of  abdominal  ring,  24 

of  fauces,  16 
Pisiform  bone,  38,  39 
Plantar  arteries,  48,  49 
Pleura,  18,  20,  28,  34 
Plexus,  brachial,  18 

prostatic,  64 
Plica  epigastrica,  53 

fimbriata,  15 

hypogastrica,  51 

semilunaris,  15 

umbilicalis  lateralis,  5 1 
media,  51 

urachi,  51 

Plicae  transversales  recti,  65 
Point,  preauricular,  7 

Rolandic,  inferior,  8 
superior,  7 

Sylvian,  8,  9 
Pomum  Adami,  16 
Popliteal  artery,  46,  47 

glands,  47 

nerves,  47 

vein,  46 

Postcentral  sulci,  9 
Pouch  of  Douglas,  66 

recto-vesical,  65 
Poupart's  ligament,  22,  24,  43,  51,  55,  57,   58, 

59,  60,  6 1 

Preauricular  point,  7 
Precentral  sulci,  7,  9 
Process,  alveolar,  15 

basilar,  16 

coracoid,  35 

ensiform,  19,  33 

external  angular,  I 

hamular,  16 

mastoid,  I 

styloid  of  third  metacarpal,  39 
radius,  38,  39 
ulna,  38 

transverse,  of  atlas,  17 

of  sixth  cervical  vertebra,  1 7 
Processus  vagiualis,  54 
Profunda  artery.     See  ARTERY. 
Promontory  of  sacrum,  24 
Prostate,  64,  65 

sheath  of,  64 
Prostatic  plexus,  64 
Pterion,  6 

Pterygo-maxillary  ligament,  16 
Pubes,  23 
Pubic  branch  of  epigastric  artery,  60 

crest,  43 

ligament,  59 

portion  ot  fascia  lata,  59 

rami,  43,  59,  63 

region,  23 


74 


INDEX   TO   APPENDIX. 


Pubic  spine,  24,  43,  51,  57,  60 

symphysis,  43 

vein,  60 
Pudic  artery,  64 

nerve,  64 

Pulley  of  superior  oblique  muscle,  14 
Pulmonary  artery,  33 

cartilage,  22 

orifice,  22,  33 
Pulse,  38 

Punctum  lacrimale,  15 
Pyloric  orifice,  23,  25,  29,  34 
Pyramidal  bone,  39 


QUADRICEPS  extensor  muscle,  43 


RADIAL  artery,  38,  39 

nerve,  37 

vein,  38 

Radio-carpal  articulation,  41 
Radius,  37,  38 
Ranine  vein,  15,  17 
Raphe  of  perineum,  62 
Receptaculum  chyli,  34 
Rectal  examination,  65 
Recto-vaginal  septum,  66 
Recto- vesical  fascia,  62,  64.  65 

pouch,  65 
Rectum,  23,  64,  65 
Rectus  muscle.     See  MUSCLES. 
REGION  or  REGIONS,  abdominal,  22 
viscera  of,  23 

epigastric,  23 

gluteal,  42 

hyo-mental,  16 

hyo-sternal,  16 

hypochondriac,  23 

hypogastric,  23 

iliac,  23 

infrahyoid,  16 

inguinal,  23 

lateral  abdominal,  23 

lumbar,  23 

of  neck.  1 6 

pubic,  23 

submaxillary,  16 

suprahyoid,  16 

umbilical,  23 
Reid,  base-line  of,  7 
Reil,  island  of,  9 
Renal  artery,  27,  29,  34 
Ribs,  19,  20,  25,  28,  30,  32,  33,  34,  35 
Rima  glottidis,  17,  32 
Ring,  abdominal,  external,  51,  55,  56 
internal,  51,  53 

crural,  60 

femoral,  54,  58,  60 
Rolandic  angle,  9 

line,  8 

point,  inferior,  8 

superior,  7 

Rolando,  fissure  of,  6,  7,  8 
Root  of  lung,  33 

Roots  of  spinal  nerves,  31,  32,  33,  34 
Rosenmiiller,  fossa  of,  16 
Round  ligament  of  uterus,  54,  55 


SAC  of  hernia,  54,  61 

lachrymal,  15 
Sacro-iliac  articulation,  42 
Sacro-sciatic  foramen,  43 

ligament,  62,  63,  65 
Sacrum,  65 

promontory  of,  24 
Sagittal  suture,  I 
Salpingo-palatine  fold,  16 
Salpingo-pharyngeal  fold,  16 
Saphenous  nerves.     See  NERVES. 

opening,  43,  57,  60,  6 1 

veins.     Sec  VEINS. 
Sartorius  muscle,  43,  46 
Scalp,  vessels  and  nerves  of,  3 
Scaphoid  bone,  39 
|    Scapula,  28,  32,  33 
Scarpa's  triangle,  43 
Sciatic,  artery,  43. 

nerve,  great,  43,  45 

small,  45 

Scrobiculus  cordis,  19 
Scrotum,  54 

Semicircular  canal,  external,  12 
Semimembranosus  muscle,  46 
Semitendinosus  muscle,  46 
Septum,  femoral,  60,  61 

intermuscular  of  arm,  external,  35,  37 

internal,  36 
ilio-pectineal,  59 
of  thigh,  external,  45 

nasi,  13,  16 

recto- vagina],  66 
Serratus  magnus  muscle,  19 
Sesamoid  bones  of  foot,  48 

of  thumb,  39 
Sheath,  crural  or  femoral,  57,  58,  60,  61 

of  prostate,  64 
Shin,  47 

Shoulder,  superficial  anatomy  of,  35 
Shoulder-joint,  35 
Sigmoid  colon,  23,  25 
Sinus,  frontal,  2 

lateral,  4,  10,  12 

rectales,  65 

superior  longitudinal,  3,  5 
Soft  palate,  16,  32 
Sole,  49 

Soleus  muscle,  47 
Space,  crico-thyroid,  1 6 

intercostal,  19,  21,  22,  28 

thyro-hyoid,  16 
Spermatic  artery,  54,  56,  60 

cord,  43,  51.  54,  56 

fascia,  51,  56,  60 

Sphincter  muscles  of  anus,  62,  63,  64,  65 
Spinal  accessory  nerve,  18 

cord,  31,  34 

furrow,  27 

nerve-roots,  31,  32,  33 
Spine,  iliac,  posterior  inferior,  43 

superior,  27,  42,  43 
anterior  superior,  24,  34,  42,  43,   51, 

57.  6l 

of  ischium,  63,  65 

nasal,  anterior,  13 

peroneal,  48 

pubic,  24,  43,  51,  57,  60 

of  scapula,  28,  33 

suprameatal,  12 

Spines,  vertebral,  20,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  42 
Spleen,  23,  29,  33,  34 


INDEX   TO   APPENDIX. 


75 


Splenic  flexure,  23,  25,  34 
Stensen's  duct,  14,  15 
Stephanion,  7 
Sternal  angle,  19 

furrow  or  groove,  19 
head  of  sterno-ruastoid,  1 7 
Sterno-clavicular  joint,  18,  22 
Sterno-mastoid  muscle,  17 
Sternum,  19,  32,  33 
Stomach,  23/25,  29,  33 
Styloid  process  of  radius,  38,  39 

of  third  metacarpal  bone,  39 
of  ulna,  38 
Subclavian  artery,  i8,*22,  32 

vein,  i 8 

Subcostal  angle,  19 
Sublingual  gland,  15 
Submaxillary  gland,  16 

region,  16 

Subpubic  arch,  62,  66 
Sulcus,  alveolo-lingual,  15 
palpebral,  external,  14 
inferior,  14 
superior,  14 
palpebro-malar,  14 
Superciliary  ridge,  I,  3 
Superficial  anatomy  of  abdomen,  22 
of  ankle,  48 
of  arm,  35 
of  back,  27 
of  chest,  19 
of  elbow,  37 
of  foot,  48 
of  forearm,  38 
of  hand,  39 

of  head  and.  neck,  i,  16 
of  hip,  42 
of  knee,  45 
of  leg,  47 
of  limb,  lower,  42 

upper,  35 
of  perineum,  62 
of  shoulder,  35 
of  thigh,  43 
of  trunk,  19 
of  wrist,  39 

Supinator  longus  muscle,  35,  36,  37,  38,  39 
Supraclavicular  fossa,  18 
Supracondylar  ridges,  35,  37 
Snprahyoid  region,  16 
Supramastoid.  crest,  n,  12,  13 
Suprameatal  fossa,  12 
spine,  12 
triangle,  12,  13 
Supraorbital  artery,  3 

foramen  or  notch,  i.  14 
nerve,  3 

Suprarenal  bodies,  23,  34 
Suprascapular  vein,  18 
Supraspinatus  muscle,  28 
Suprasternal  notch,  17 
Supratrochlear  nerve,  3 
Suture,  fronto-malar,  i,  7 
lambdoid,  i 
masto-squamosal,  12 
naso-frontal,  5 
parieto-mastoid,  5 
sagittal,  i 

Sustentaculum  tali,  48 
Sylvian  line,  8 
point,  8,  9 
Sylvius,  fissure  of,  6,  8 


TABLE  of  levels  of  structures  of  trunk,  32 

Tail  of  pancreas,  23 

Tarsal  articulation,  transverse,  48 

bones,  48 

ligament,  internal,  15 
Tarso-metatarsal  articulations,  48 
Teeth,  15 

Tegmen  tympani,  1 1 
Temporal  artery,  superficial,  3 

convolution,  interior,  1 1 

crest,  i,  7,  9 

line,  lower,  I 

lobe  of  cerebrum,  7,  1 1 

muscle,  i,  15 

Temporo-maxillary  joint,  13 
Tendinous  inscriptions,  24 
Tendo  Achillis,  47 

palpebrarum,  15 
Tendon,  conjoined,  51,  56,  60 
Tensor  vaginae  femoris,  42 
Teres  muscles,  35 
Testis,  54 

Thigh,  superficial  cinatorny  of,  43 
Thenar  eminence,  39 
Thoracic  duct,  arch  of,  32 
Thyro-hyoid  space,  16 
Thyroid  arteries,  17 
*  body,  17 

cartilage,  16,  32 

veins,  18 

Tibia,  45,  46,  47,  48 
Tibial  arteries,  47,  48,  49 

nerves,  47,  49 
Tibiales  muscles,  47,  48,  49 
Tongue,  15,  32 
Tonsil,  1 6,  1 8 

pharyngeal,  16 

Topographical  anatomy,  cranio-cerebral,  5 
of  groin,  51 
of  mastoid  antrum,  10 
of  perineum,  62 
Trachea,  16,  28,  32,  33 
Transversalis  abdominis  muscle,  51,  56 

fascia,  51,  56,  58,  60 
Transverse  ligament,  superficial,  of  hand,  41 

process  of  atlas,  1 7 

of  sixth  cervical  vertebra,  1 7 

tarsal  articulation,  48 
Transversus  perinei  muscle,  64 
Trapezium,  39 
Trapezius  muscle,  28 
Triangle  ot  neck,  anterior,  17 
posterior,  18 

of  Hesselbach,  55,  56 

of  Scarpa,  43 

suprameatal,  12,  13 
Triangular  fascia,  5 1 

ligament,  62,  63,  64,  65 

tendon  of  trapezius,  28 
Triceps  muscle,  35,  37 
Trochanter,  great,  42,  43 
Trochlear  surface  of  femur,  46 
True  perineum,  62 
Trunk,  levels  of  structures  in,  32 

superficial  anatomy  of,  19, 
Tubercle,  adductor,  45,  46 

carotid,  17 

marginal,  7 

of  radius,  38 

of  tibia,  46,  48 
Tuberosity  of  femur,  45,  46 

of  fifth  metatarsal,  48,  49 


76 


INDEX   TO    APPENDIX. 


Tuberosity  of  ischium,  43,  62,  65 
of  navicular  bone.  48 
of  os  calcis,  47,  48,  49 
of  scaphoid,  39 
of  tibia,  45,  46 

Tunica  vaginalis,  54 

Turbinate  bodies,  13,  1 6 
bone,  inferior,  13,  1 6 

Tympanum,  attic  of,  10 


ULNA,  38 

Ulnar  artery,  38,  39 

nerve,  36,  39 

vein,  37,  38 
Umbilical  region,  23 
Umbilicus,  23,  24,  28,  34 
Unciform  bone,  39 

Upper  limb,  superficial  anatomy  of,  35 
Urachus,  51 
Urethra,  bulb  of,  62 

membranous  part  of,  62.  64 
Urethral  part  of  perineum,  62 
Uterus,  23,  66 

broad  ligament  of,  66 
Uvula,  1 6 


VAGINAL  examination,  66 
Valves  of  Morgagni,  65 
Vas  deferens,  51,  54,  65 
Vascular  compartment,  58 
Vasti  muscles,  44,  45 
VEIN  or  VEINS,  azygos,  33 

basilic,  36,  37 

at  bend  of  elbow,  37 

cephalic,  36,  37 

cervical,  transverse,  18 

dorsal  of  penis,  64 

endocranial,  3 

epigastric,  superficial,  24 

facial,  17 

femoral,  45,  57,  60 

frontal,  3 

iliac,  external,  54,  57,  58,  60 

innominate,  22,  33 

intercostal,  22 


VEIN  or  VEINS — continued. 

jugular,  anterior,  18 
external,  18 
internal,  17 

median,  37,  38 

median-basilic,  37 

median-cephalic,  37 

popliteal,  46 

pubic,  60 

radial,  37,  38 

ranine,  15,  17 

saphenous,  external,  46,  47,  49 
internal,  43,  45,  46,  47,  49,  60 

of  scalp,  3 

subclavian,  18 

suprascapular,  18 

thyroid,  18 

ulnar,  37,  38 
Vena  cava  inferior,  27,  33,  34 

cava  superior,  22,  33 

thoraco-epigastrica,  24 
Ventricles,  lateral,  9 

of  heart,  33 

Vermiform  appendix,  23 
Vertebrae,  cervical,  16,  27 

bodies  of,  19,  23,  27,  32,  33,  34 

spines  of,  20,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  42 
Vertebral  artery,  5 
Vesicula;  seminales,  65 
Vessels.     Sec  ARTERIES,  VEINS. 
Viscera  abdominal,  23,  24 

pelvic,  examination  of,  65 
Volar  artery,  superficial,  41 


WALL  of  abdomen,  23,  56 
Web  of  fingers,  40,  41 
Wharton,  duct  of,  15 
Winslow,  foramen  of,  34 
Wrist,  superficial  anatomy  of,  39 


XIPHISTEHNAL  articulation,  19,  24.  25.  33 


ZYGOMA,  i 

Zygomatic  arch,  7 


THE    END. 


BRADBURY,   AGNEW,    &   CO.    LJX,   PRINTER?,    WHITEFR1AES. 


A    LIST    OF    WORKS    ON 

MEDICINE,    SURGERY 

AND 

GENERAL    SCIENCE, 

PUBLISHED  BY 

LONGMANS,   GREEN    &    CO., 

LONDON,  NEW  YORK,  AND  BOMBAY. 


Ubital   atttr    Surgual   Marks. 


ASH  BY.  NOTES  ON  PHYSIOLOGY  FOR  THE  USE  OF 
STUDENTS  PREPARING  FOR  EXAMINATION.  By 
HENRY  ASHBY,  M.D.  Lond.,  F.R.C.P.,  Physician  to  the  General  Hospital 
for  Sick  Children,  Manchester  ;  formerly  Demonstrator  of  Physiology,  Liver- 
pool School  of  Medicine.  Sixth  Edition,  thoroughly  revised.  With  141 
Illustrations.  Fcap.  8vo,  price  $s. 


ASHBY    AND    WRIGHT.      THE  DISEASES  OF  CHILDREN, 

MEDICAL  AND  SURGICAL.  By  HENRY  ASHBY,  M.D. 
Lond.,  F.R.C.P.,  Physician  to  the  General  Hospital  for  Sick  Children,  Man- 
chester ;  Lecturer  and  Examiner  in  Diseases  of  Children  in  the  Victoria 
University;  and  G.  A.  WRIGHT,  B.A.,  M.B.  Oxon.,  F.R.C.S.  Eng., 
Assistant  Surgeon  to  the  Manchester  Royal  Infirmary  and  Surgeon  to  the 
Children's  Hospital;  formerly  Examiner  in  Surgery  in  the  University  of  Oxford. 
Enlarged  and  Improved  Edition.  With  192  Illustrations.  8vo,  price  z$s. 


BENNETT.—  WORKS   by    WILLIAM   H.    BENNETT,    F.R.C.S., 

Surgeon  to  St.  George's  Hospital;  Member  of  the  Board  of  Examiners,  Royal  College  of 
Surgeons  of  England. 

CLINICAL    LECTURES   ON   VARICOSE    VEINS    OF    THE 
'LOWER    EXTREMITIES.    With  3  Plates.    8vo.    6s. 

ON  VARICOCELE:  A  PRACTICAL  TREATISE.     With  4  Tables 
and  a  Diagram.     8vo.     5-r. 

CLINICAL  LECTURES  ON  ABDOMINAL  HERNIA :  chiefly  in 

relation  to  Treatment,  including  the  Radical  Cure.     With  12  Diagrams  in  the 
Text.     8vo.     Ss.  6d. 


WORKS  ON  MEDICINE,  SURGERY  frc. 


BENTLEY.   A  TEXT-BOOK  OF  ORGANIC  MATERIA  MEDICA. 

Comprising  a  Description  of  the  Vegetable  and  Animal  Drugs  of  the  British 
Pharmacopoeia,  with  some  others  in  common  use.  Arranged  Systematically, 
and  Especially  Designed  for  Students.  By  ROBERT  BENTLEY,  M.R.C.  S. 
Eng.,  F.L.S.  With  62  Illustrations  on  Wood.  Crown  8vo,  price  7-r.  6rf. 


COATS.      A  MANUAL  OF  PATHOLOGY.     By  JOSEPH  COATS, 

M.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology  in  the  University  of  Glasgow.     Third  Edition. 
Revised  throughout.     With  507  Illustrations.      8vo,  31*.  6d. 


COOKE.—  WORKS  by  THOMAS  COOKE,  F.R.C.S.  Eng.,  B.A.,  B.Sc., 

M.D.  Paris,  Senior  Assistant  Surgeon  to  the  Westminster  Hospital. 

TABLETS  OF  ANATOMY.  Being  a  Synopsis  of  Demonstrations  given 
in  the  Westminster  Hospital  Medical  School  in  the  years  1871-75.  Tenth 
Thousand,  being  a  selection  of  the  Tablets  believed  to  be  most  useful  to 
Students  generally.  Post  410,  price  ior.  6d. 

APHORISMS  IN  APPLIED  ANATOMY  AND  OPERATIVE 
SURGERY.  Including  100  Typical  vivd  voce  Questions  on  Surface 
Marking,  &c.  Crown  8vo,  3*.  6d. 

DISSECTION  GUIDES.  Aiming  at  Extending  and  Facilitating  such 
Practical  Work  in  Anatomy  as  will  be  specially  useful  in  connection  with  an 
ordinary  Hospital  Curriculum.  8vo,  IO.T.  6d. 


DICKINSON.—  WORKS   by    W.    HOWS  HIP    DICKINSON,  M.D. 

Cantab.,  F.R.C.P.,  Physician  to-,  and  Lecturer  on  Medicine  at,  St.  George's  Hospital; 
Consulting  Physician  to  the  Hospital  for  Sick  Children. 

ON  RENAL  AND   URINARY  AFFECTIONS.      Complete  in  Three 
Parts,  8vo,  with  12  Plates  and  122  Woodcuts.     Price  £3  45.  6</.  cloth. 

*»*  The  Parts  can  also  be  had  separately,  each  complete  in  itself,  as  follows  : — 
PART     I. — Diabetes,  price  icxr.  6d.  sewed,  I2J.  cloth. 
,,      II. — Albuminuria,  price  £l  sewed,  £l  is.  cloth. 

,,    III. — Miscellaneous  Affections  of  the  Kidneys  and  Urine,  price  £l   I  or. 
sewed,  £i  us.  6d.  cloth. 

THE  TONGUE  AS  AN  INDICATION  OF  DISEASE;  being  the 
Lumleian  Lectures  delivered  at  the  Royal  College  of  Physicians  in  March,  1888. 
8vo,  price  Js.  6d. 

THE    HARVEIAN    ORATION   ON  HARVEY  IN    ANCIENT 

AND  MODERN  MEDICINE.     Crown  8vo,  «.  &/. 
OCCASIONAL  PAPERS  ON  MEDICAL  SUBJECTS,  1855-1896. 

8vO,    12S. 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,   GREEN  &•  CO.  3 

DUANE.  THE  STUDENT'S  DICTIONARY  OF  MEDICINE 
AND  THE  ALLIED  SCIENCES.  Comprising  the  Pronunciation, 
Derivation,  and  Full  Explanation  of  Medical  Terms,  together  with  much 
Collateral  Descriptive  Matter,  numerous  Tables,  &c.  By  ALEXANDER 
DUANE,  M.D.,  Assistant-Surgeon  to  the  New  York  Ophthalmic  and  Aural 
Institute,  Reviser  of  Medical  Terms  for  "Webster's  International  Dictionary." 
8vo,  2U. 


ERICHSEN.—  WORKS  by  Sir  JOHN  ERIC  ERICHSEN,  Bart., 

F.R.S.,  LL.D.  (Edin.\  Hon.  M.  Ch.  and  F.R.C.S.  (Ireland),  Surgeon  Extraordinary  to 
H.M.  the  Queen;  President  of  University  College,  London;  Fellow  and  Ex-President  of 
the  Royal  College  of  Surgeons  of  England;  Emeritus  Professor  of  Surgery  in  University 
College  ;  Consulting-Surgeon  to  University  College  Hospital,  and  to  many  other  Medical 
Charities. 

THE  SCIENCE  AND  ART  OF  SURGERY ;  A  TREATISE 
ON  SURGICAL  INJURIES,  DISEASES,  AND  OPERATIONS. 
Tenth  Edition.  Revised  by  the  late  MARCUS  BECK,  M.S.  &  M.B. 
(Lond.),  F.R.C.S.,  Surgeon  to  University  College  Hospital,  and  Professor  of 
Surgery  in  University  College,  London  ;  and  by  RAYMOND  JOHNSON, 
M.B.  &  B.S.  (Lend.),  F.R.C.S.,  Assistant  Surgeon  to  University  College 
Hospital,  &c.  Illustrated  by  nearly  1,000  Engravings  on  Wood.  2  Vols. 
royal  8vo,  4&r. 


FRANKLAND.      MICRO-ORGANISMS    IN    WATER,    THEIR 
SIGNIFICANCE,     IDENTIFICATION,    AND     REMOVAL. 

Together  with  an  Account  of  the  Bacteriological  Methods  Involved  in  their 
Investigation.  Specially  Designed  for  the  Use  of  those  connected  with  the 
Sanitary  Aspects  of  Water  Supply.  By  Professor  PERCY  FRANKLAND, 
Ph.D.,  B.Sc.  (Lond.),  F.R.S.,  Fellow  of  the  Chemical  Society;  and 
Mrs.  PERCY  FRANKLAND,  Joint  Author  of  "Studies  on  Some  New 
Micro-Organisms  Obtained  from  Air."  With  2  Plates  and  numerous  Diagrams. 
8vo.  i6s.  net. 


GAIRDNER  AND  COATS.     ON  THE  DISEASES  CLASSIFIED 

by  the  REGISTRAR-GENERAL  as  TABES  MESENTERICA.  LEC- 
TURES TO  PRACTITIONERS.  By  W.  T.  GAIRDNER,  M.D.,  LL.D. 
On  the  PATHOLOGY  of  PHTHISIS  PULMONALIS.  By  JOSEPH 
COATS,  M.D.  With  28  Illustrations.  8vo,  price  12s.  6d. 


WORKS  ON  MEDICINE,  SURGERY  &•<:. 


GARROD.—  WORKS  by  Sir  ALFRED  BARING  GARROD,  M.D., 

F.R.S.,  &c.  ;  Physician  Extraordinary  to  H.M.  the  Queen;  Consulting  Physician  to 
King's  College  Hospital;  late  Vice-President  of  the  Royal  College  of  Physicians. 

A  TREATISE  ON  GOUT  AND  RHEUMATIC  GOUT 
(RHEUMATOID  ARTHRITIS).  Third  Edition,  thoroughly  revised 
and  enlarged;  with  6  Plates,  comprising  21  Figures  (14  Coloured),  and  27 
Illustrations  engraved  on  Wood.  8vo,  price  2is. 

THE  ESSENTIALS  OF  MATERIA  MEDICA  AND  THERA- 
PEUTICS. The  Thirteenth  Edition,  revised  and  edited,  under  the  super- 
vision of  the  Author,  by  NESTOR  TIRARD,  M.D.  Lond.,  F.R.C.P., 
Professor  of  Materia  Medica  and  Therapeutics  in  King's  College,  London,  &c. 
Crown  8vo,  price  12s.  6cf. 


GRAY.  ANATOMY,  DESCRIPTIVE  AND  SURGICAL.  By 
HENRY  GRAY,  F.R.S.,  late  Lecturer  on  Anatomy  at  St.  George's 
Hospital.  The  Thirteenth  Edition,  re-edited  by  T.  PICKERING  PICK, 
Surgeon  to  St.  George's  Hospital ;  Member  of  the  Court  of  Examiners,  Royal 
College  of  Surgeons  of  England.  With  636  large  Woodcut  Illustrations,  a 
large  proportion  of  which  are  Coloured,  the  Arteries  being  coloured  red,  the 
Veins  blue,  and  the  Nerves  yellow.  The  attachments  of  the  muscles  to  the 
bones,  in  the  section  on  Osteology,  are  also  shown  in  coloured  outline.  Royal 
8vo,  price  36^. 


HALLIBURTON.—  WORKS   by    W.  D.    HALLIBURTON,    M.D., 

F.R.S.,  M.R.C.P.,  Professor  of  Physiology  in  King's  College,  London;  Lecturer  on  Phy- 
siology at  the  London  School  of  Medicine  for  Women. 

A     TEXT-BOOK     OF     CHEMICAL     PHYSIOLOGY     AND 
PATHOLOGY.     With  104  Illustrations.    8vo,  28*. 

ESSENTIALS  OF  CHEMICAL  PHYSIOLOGY.     Second  Edition. 
8vo,  5^. 

%*  This  is  a  book  suitable  for  medical  students.  It  treats  of  the 
subject  in  the  same  way  as  Prof.  SCHAFER'S  "  Essentials"  treats  of  Histology. 
It  contains  a  number  of  elementary  and  advanced  practical  lessons,  followed  in 
each  case  by  a  brief  descriptive  account  of  the  facts  related  to  the  exercises 
which  are  intended  to  be  performed  by  each  member  of  the  class. 


LANG.— THE     METHODICAL     EXAMINATION     OF     THE 

EYE.  Being  Part  I.  of  a  Guide  to  the  Practice  of  Ophthalmology  for  Students 
and  Practitioners.  By  WILLIAM  LANG,  F.R.C.S.  Eng.,  Surgeon  to  the 
"Royal  London  Ophthalmic  Hospital,  Moorfields,  &c.  With  15  Illustrations. 
Crown  8vo,  3.1.  (>d. 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,   GREEN  6-  CO, 


LANGTON.  ABDOMINAL  HERNIA.  By  JOHN  LANGTON,  F.R.C.S., 

Surgeon  to  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital,  Senior  Surgeon  to  the  City  of  London 
Truss  Society,  Member  of  the  Council  and  Court  of  Examiners  of  the  Royal 
College  of  Surgeons  of  England,  With  numerous  Illustrations.  [In  the  press. 


LIVE  ING.—  WORKS  by  ROBERT  LIVEING,  M.A.  &>  M.D.  Cantab., 

F.R.C.P.  Land.,  &>c.,  Physician  to  the  Department  for  Diseases  of  the  Skin  at  the 
Middlesex  Hospital,  &*c. 

HANDBOOK  ON  DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN.  With  especial 
reference  to  Diagnosis  and  Treatment.  Fifth  Edition,  revised  and  enlarged. 
Fcap.  8vo,  price  $s. 

ELEPHANTIASIS  GR^CORUM,  OR  TRUE  LEPROSY; 
Being  the  Goulstonian  Lectures  for  1873.  Cr.  8vo,  4*.  6</. 


LONGMORE.—  WORKS  by  Surgeon-General  Sir   7*.  LONGMORE 

(Retired),  C.B.,  F.R.C.S.,   late  Professor   of  Military  Surgery  in  the  Army  Medical 
School;  Officer  of  the  Legion  of  Honour. 

THE  ILLUSTRATED  OPTICAL  MANUAL;  OR,  HAND- 
BOOK  OF  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  THE  GUIDANCE  OF 
SURGEONS  IN  TESTING  QUALITY  AND  RANGE  OF 
VISION,  AND  IN  DISTINGUISHING  AND  DEALING  WITH  OPTICAL 
DEFECTS  IN  GENERAL.  Illustrated  by  74  Drawings  and  Diagrams  by 
Inspector-General  Dr.  MACDONALD,  R.N.,  F.R.S.,  C.B.  Fourth  Edition. 
8vo,  price  14?. 

GUNSHOT  INJURIES.  Their  History,  Characteristic  Features,  Com- 
plications, and  General  Treatment ;  with  Statistics  concerning  them  as  they 
have  been  met  with  in  Warfare.  With  78  Illustrations.  8vo,  price  y.s.  6d. 


LUFF.  TEXT -BOOK  OF  FORENSIC  MEDICINE  AND 
TOXICOLOGY.  By  ARTHUR  P.  LUFF,  M.D.,  B.Sc.  (Lond.), 
Physician  in  Charge  of  Out-Patients  and  Lecturer  on  Medical  Jurisprudence 
and  Toxicology  in  St.  Mary's  Hospital ;  Examiner  in  Forensic  Medicine  in 
the  University  of  London ;  External  Examiner  in  Forensic  Medicine  in  the 
Victoria  University  ;  Official  Analyst  to  the  Home  Office.  With  numerous 
Illustrations.  2  vols.,  crown  8vo,  24^. 


MUNK.  THE  LIFE  OF  SIR  HENRY  HALFORD,  Bart.,  G.C.H., 
M.D.,  F.R.S.,  President  of  the  Royal  College  of  Physicians,  Physician  to 
George  III.,  George  IV.,  William  IV.,  and  to  Her  Majesty  Queen  Victoria. 
By  William  MUNK,  M.D.,  F.S.A.,  Fellow  and  late  Vice- President  of  the 
Royal  College  of  Physicians  of  London.  With  2  Portraits.  8vo,  1 2s.  6d. 


WORKS  ON  MEDICINE,  SURGERY  frc. 


NEWMAN,  ON  THE  DISEASES  OF  THE  KIDNEY 
AMENABLE  TO  SURGICAL  TREATMENT.  Lectures  to 
Practitioners.  By  DAVID  NEWMAN,  M.D.,  Surgeon  to  the  Western 
Infirmary  Out-Door  Department ;  Pathologist  and  Lecturer  on  Pathology  at 
the  Glasgow  Royal  Infirmary ;  Examiner  in  Pathology  in  the  University  of 
Glasgow  ;  Vice-President  Glasgow  Pathological  and  Clinical  Society.  8vo, 
price  1 6.?. 


NOTTER   AND    FIRTH.     HYGIENE.    By  J.  L.  NOTTER,  M.A., 

M.D.,  Fellow  and  Member  of  Council  of  the  Sanitary  Institute  of  Great  Britain, 
Examiner  in  Hygiene,  Science  and  Art  Department,  etc.;  and  R.  H.  FIRTH, 
F.R.C.S.,  Assistant  Examiner  in  Hygiene,  Science  and  Art  Department. 
With  93  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  3*.  (xt. 


OWEN.  A  MANUAL  OF  ANATOMY  FOR  SENIOR  STUDENTS. 
By  EDMUND  OWEN,  M.B.,  F.R.S.C.,  Senior  Surgeon  to  the  Hospital 
for  Sick  Children,  Great  Ormond  Street,  Surgeon  to  St.  Mary's  Hospital, 
London,  and  co- Lecturer  on  Surgery,  late  Lecturer  on  Anatomy  in  its  Medical 
School.  With  2IO  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  price  izs.  6d. 


POOLE.     COOKERY     FOR     THE     DIABETIC.     By  W.  H.  and 
Mrs.  POOLE.     With  Preface  by  Dr,  PAVY.     Fcap.  8vo.     2s.  (>d. 


POORE.     ESSAYS  ON  RURAL  HYGIENE.    By  GEORGE  VIVIAN 
POORE,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P.     Crown  8vo,  6s.  6d. 


QUAIN.  A  DICTIONARY  OF  MEDICINE;  Including  General 
Pathology,  General  Therapeutics,  Hygiene,  and  the  Diseases  of  Women 
and  Children.  By  Various  Writers.  Edited  by  RICHARD  QUAIN,  Bart., 
M.D.Lond.,  LL.D.Edin.  (Hon.)  F.R.S.,  Physician  Extraordinary  to  H.M.  the 
Queen,  President  of  the  General  Medical  Council,  Member  of  the  Senate  of  the 
University  of  London,  &c.  Assisted  by  FREDERICK  THOMAS  ROBERTS, 
M.D.Lond.,  B.Sc.,  Fellow  of  the  Royal  College  of  Physicians,  Fellow  of 
University  College,  Professor  of  Materia  Medica  and  Therapeutics,  University 
College,  &c. ;  and  J.  MITCHELL  BRUCE,  M.A.Abdn.,  M.D.Lond.,  Fellow 
of  the  Royal  College  of  Physicians  of  London,  Physician  and  Lecturer  on  the 
Principles  and  Practice  of  Medicine,  Charing  Cross  Hospital,  &c.  New 
Edition,  Revised  throughout  and  Enlarged.  In  2  Vols.  medium  8vo,  cloth, 
red  edges,  price  40^.  net. 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,  GREEN  6-  CO.  7 

QUAIN.  QUAIN'S  (JONES)  ELEMENTS  OF  ANATOMY. 
The  Tenth  Edition.  Edited  by  EDWARD  ALBERT  SCHAFER,  F.R.S., 
Professor  of  Physiology  and  Histology  in  University  College,  London  ;  and 
GEORGE  DANCER  THANE,  Professor  of  Anatomy  in  University  College, 
London.  In  3  Vols. 

%*  The  several  parts  of  this  work  (which  is  now  complete,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  an  Appendix  on  Superficial  Anatomy)  form  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOKS 
OF  THEIR  RESPECTIVE  SUBJECTS.  They  can  be  obtained  separately  as 
follows : — 

VOL.  I.,  PART  I.  EMBRYOLOGY.  By  Professor  SCHAFER.  Illustrated 
by  200  Engravings,  many  of  which  are  coloured.  Royal  8vo,  9*.  [Ready. 

VOL.  I.,  PART  II.  GENERAL  ANATOMY  OR  HISTOLOGY. 
By  Professor  SCHAFER.  Illustrated  by  491  Engravings,  many  of  which 
are  coloured.  Royal  8vo,  \2s.  6d.  [Ready. 

VOL.  II.,  PART  I.  OSTEOLOGY.  By  Professor  THANE.  Illustrated 
by  1 68  Engravings.  Royal  8vo,  gs.  [Ready. 

VOL.  II.,  PART  II.  ARTHROLOGY,  MYOLOGY,  ANGEIOLOGY. 
By  Professor  THANE.  Illustrated  by  255  Engravings,  many  of  which  are 
Coloured.  Royal  8vo,  i8s.  [Ready. 

VOL.  III.,  PART  I.   THE  SPINAL  CORD  AND  BRAIN.  By  Professor        / 
SCHAFER.     Illustrated  by  139  Engravings.     Royal  8vo,  12s.  6d.       [Ready. 

VOL.  III.,  PART  II.  THE  NERVES.  By  Professor  THANE.  Illustrated 
by  102  Engravings,  many  of  which  are  Coloured.  Royal  8vo,  gs.  [Ready. 

VOL.  III.,  PART  III.  THE  ORGANS  OF  THE  SENSES.  By  Professor 
SCHAFER.  Illustrated  by  1 78  Engravings.  Royal  8vo,  9-r.  [Ready* 

VOL.  III.,  PART  IV.     SPLANCHNOLOGY.     By  Professor   SCHAFER 
and   Professor  JOHNSON   SYMINGTON,  M.D.     With  337  Illustrations.      ^ 
Royal  8vo,  i6s.  [Ready. 

SUPERFICIAL  AND   SURGICAL  ANATOMY. 
By  Professor  THANE  and  Professor  RICKMAN  J.  GODLEE,  M.S. 

(To  be  shortly  published  as  an  Appendix  to  the  whole  work.) 


RICHARDSON.  THE  ASCLEPIAD.  A  Book  of  Original  Research  in 
the  Science,  Art,  and  Literature  of  Medicine.  By  BENJAMIN  WARD 
RICHARDSON,  M.D.,  F.R.S.  Published  Quarterly,  price  2s.  6d.  Volumes 
for  1884,  1885,  1886,  1887,  1888,  1889,  1890,  1891,  1892,  &  1893.  8vo,  price 
I2s.  6d.  each. 

SCHAFER.  THE  ESSENTIALS  OF  HISTOLOGY:  Descrip- 
tive and  Practical.  For  the  Use  of  Students.  By  E.  A.  SCHAFER,  F.R.S., 
Jodrell  Professor  of  Physiology  in  University  College,  London  ;  Editor  of  the 
Histological  Portion  of  Quain's  ' '  Anatomy. "  Illustrated  by  more  than  300 
Figures,  many  of  which  are  new.  Fourth  Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged. 
8vo,  7-f.  6d.  (Interleaved,  los.) 


SCHENK.  MANUAL  OF  BACTERIOLOGY.  For  Practitioners  and 
Students.  With  especial  reference  to  Practical  Methods.  By  Dr.  S.  L. 
SCHENK,  Professor  (Extraordinary)  in  the  University  of  Vienna.  Trans- 
lated from  the  German,  with  an  Appendix,  by  W.  R.  DAWS  ON,  B.A., 
M.D.,  Univ.  Dub.  ;  late  University  Travelling  Prizeman  in  Medicine.  With 
100  Illustrations,  some  of  which  are  coloured.  8vo,  io.r.  net. 


SMALE    AND    COLYER.     DISEASES    AND    INJURIES    OF 

THE  TEETH,  including  Pathology  and  Treatment :  a  Manual  of  Practical 
Dentistry  for  Students  and  Practitioners.  By  MORTON  SMALE,  M.  R.C.  S. , 
L.S.A.,  L.D.S.,  Dental  Surgeon  to  St.  Mary's  Hospital,  Dean  of  the  School, 
Dental  Hospital  of  London,  &c.  ;  and  J.  F.  COLYER,  L.R.C.P.,  M.R.C.S., 
L.  D.S. ,  Assistant  Dental  Surgeon  to  Charing  Cross  Hospital,  and  Assistant 
Dental  Surgeon  to  the  Dental  Hospital  of  London.  With  334  Illustrations. 
Large  Crown  8vo,  i$s. 

SMITH  (H.  F.).  THE  HANDBOOK  FOR  MIDWIVES.  By 
HENRY  FLY  SMITH,  B.A.,  M.B.  Oxon.,  M.R.C.S.  Second  Edition. 
With  41  Woodcuts.  Crown  8vo,  price  $s. 


STEEL.—  WORKS  by  JOHN  HENRY  STEEL,  F.R.C.V.S.,  F.Z.S., 

A.V.D.,  late  Professor  of  Veterinary  Science  and  Principal  of  Bombay  Veterinary 
College. 

A  TREATISE  ON  THE  DISEASES  OF  THE  DOG;  being  a 
Manual  of  Canine  Pathology.  Especially  adapted  for  the  use  of  Veterinary 
Practitioners  and  Students.  88  Illustrations.  8vo,  los.  6d. 

A  TREATISE  ON  THE  DISEASES  OF  THE  OX;  being  a 
Manual  of  Bovine  Pathology.  Especially  adapted  for  the  use  of  Veterinary 
Practitioners  and  Students.  2  Plates  and  117  Woodcuts.  8vo,  15^. 

A  TREATISE  ON  THE  DISEASES  OF  THE  SHEEP;  being 
a  Manual  of  Ovine  Pathology  for  the  use  of  Veterinary  Practitioners  and 
Students.  With  Coloured  Plate,  and  99  Woodcuts.  8vo,  izr. 

OUTLINES  OF  EQUINE  ANATOMY;  a  Manual  for  the  use  of 
Veterinary  Students  in  the  Dissecting  Room.  Crown  8vo,  "js.  6d. 


"STONEHENGE."    THE  DOG  IN  HEALTH  AND  DISEASE. 

By  "STONEHENGE."  With  84  Wood  Engravings.  Square  crown  8vo,  ^s.  6d. 


THORNTON.     HUMAN  PHYSIOLOGY.    By  JOHN  THORNTON, 

M.A. ,  Author  of  "Elementary  Physiography,"  "Advanced  Physiography," 
&c.     With  267  Illustrations,  some  of  which  are  Coloured.     Crown  8vo,  6s. 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,   GREEN  <S^   CO. 


WALLER.  AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  HUMAN  PHYSIOLOGY. 
By  AUGUSTUS  D.  WALLER,  M.D.,  Lecturer  on  Physiology  at  St.  Mary's 
Hospital  Medical  School,  London  ;  late  External  Examiner  at  the  Victorian 
University.  Second  Edition,  Revised.  With  305  Illustrations.  8vo,  18^. 


WEICHSELBAUM.  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  PATHOLOGICAL 
HISTOLOGY,  With  Special  Reference  to  Practical  Methods. 
By  Dr.  ANTON  WEICHSELBAUM,  Professor  of  Pathology  in  the 
University  of  Vienna.  Translated  by  W.  R.  DAWSON,  M.D.  (Dub.), 
Demonstrator  of  Pathology  in  the  Royal  College  of  Surgeons,  Ireland,  late 
Medical  Travelling  Prizeman  of  Dublin  University,  £c.  With  221  Figures, 
partly  in  Colours,  a  Chromo-lithographic  Plate,  and  ^  Photographic  Plates. 
Royal  8vo,  21.?.  net.  

WILKS   AND    MOXON.     LECTURES   ON   PATHOLOGICAL 

ANATOMY.  By  SAMUEL  WILKS,  M.D.,  F.R.S.,  Consulting  Physician 
to,  and  formerly  Lecturer  on  Medicine  and  Pathology  at,  Guy's  Hospital,  and 
the  late  WALTER  MOXON,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P.,  Physician  to,  and  some  time 
Lecturer  on  Pathology  at,  Guy's  Hospital.  Third  Edition,  thoroughly  Re- 
vised. By  SAMUEL  WILKS,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  F.R.S.  8vo,  iSs. 


YOU  ATT.—  WORKS  by  WILLIAM  YOU  ATT. 

THE   HORSE.      Revised  and   Enlarged  by  W.   WATSON,    M.R.C.V.S. 

With  52  Woodcuts.    8vo,  7s.  6d. 
THE    DOG.     Revised  and  Enlarged.     With  33  Woodcuts.     8vo,  6s. 


BENNETT    AND    MURRAY.     A   HANDBOOK    OF    CRYP- 

TOGAMIC  BOTANY.  By  A.  W.  BENNETT,  M.A.,  B.Sc.,  F.L.S., 
and  GEORGE  R.  MILNE  MURRAY,  F.L.S.  With  378  Illustrations. 
8vo,  i6j.  

CARNEGIE.  LAW  AND  THEORY  IN  CHEMISTRY:  A  COM- 
PANION BOOK  FOR  STUDENTS.  By  DOUGLAS  CARNEGIE, 
sometime  Scholar  and  Demonstrator  in  Chemistry  of  Gonville  and  Caius, 
Cambridge.  Crown  8vo,  6s. 


CLERKE.     THE    SYSTEM    OF   THE    STARS.    By  AGNES  M. 

CLERKE,   Author  of  "A   History  of  Astronomy  during  the   Nineteenth 
Century."    With  6  Plates  and  Numerous  Illustrations.     8vo,  2is. 


io  GENERAL  SCIENTIFIC   WORKS 


CLODD.—  WORKS  by  EDWARD  CLODD,  Author  of"  The  Childhood 

of  the  World"  &°c. 

THE    STORY    OF    CREATION.       A    Plain    Account    of  Evolution. 
With  77  Illustrations.     Crown  8vo,  3*.  6d. 

A  PRIMER  OF  EVOLUTION :  being  a  Popular  Abridged  Edition  of 
"The  Story  of  Creation."    With  Illustrations.     Fcp.  8vo,  is.  6ct. 


CROOKES.    SELECT  METHODS  IN  CHEMICAL  ANALYSIS 

(chiefly  Inorganic).  By  W.  CROOKES,  F.R.S.,  V.P.C.S.,  Editor  of 
"The  Chemical  News."  Third  Edition,  re-written  and  enlarged.  Illus- 
trated with  67  Woodcuts.  8vo,  2is.  net. 


CULLEY.      A  HANDBOOK  OF    PRACTICAL  TELEGRAPHY. 

By  R.  S.  CULLEY,  M.I.C.E.,  late  Engineer-in-Chief  of  Telegraphs  to  the 
Post  Office.     With  135  Woodcuts  and  17  Plates,  8vo,  i6j. 


DU    BOIS.     THE  MAGNETIC   CIRCUIT  IN   THEORY  AND 

PRACTICE.  By  Dr.  H.  DU  BOIS,  Privatdocent  in  the  University  of 
Berlin.  Translated  from  the  German  by  Dr.  E.  ATKINSON.  With 
numerous  Illustrations.  8vo,  12s.  net. 


GANOT.  ELEMENTARY  TREATISE  ON  PHYSICS; 
Experimental  and  Applied,  for  the  use  of  Colleges  and  Schools.  Translated 
and  edited  from  GANOT'S  Elements  de  Physique  (with  the  Author's  sanction) 
by  E.  ATKINSON,  Ph.D.,  F.C.S.,  formerly  Professor  of  Experimental 
Science,  Staff  College,  Sandhurst.  Fourteenth  Edition,  revised  and  enlarged, 
with  9  Coloured  Plates  and  1,028  Woodcuts.  Large  crown  8vo,  15.?. 

NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY  FOR  GENERAL  READERS 
AND  YOUNG  PERSONS;  Translated  and  Edited  from  GANOT'S 
Cours  Ettmentaire  de  Physique  (with  the  Author's  sanction)  by  E.  ATKIN- 
SON, Ph.D.,  F.C.S.  Eighth  Edition,  carefully  revised;  with  7  Plates, 
624  Woodcuts,  and  an  Appendix  of  Questions.  Crown  8vo,  "js .  6d. 


GOODEVE.—  WORKS  by   T.   M.   GOODEVE,   M.A.,    Barrister-at- 

Law  ;  Professor  of  Mechanics  at  the  Normal  School  of  Science  and  the  Royal  School  oj 
Mines. 

PRINCIPLES  OF  MECHANICS.  New  Edition,  re-written  and 
enlarged.  With  253  Woodcuts  and  numerous  Examples.  Crown  8vo,  6s. 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  MECHANISM.  New  Edition,  re- written 
and  enlarged.  With  342  Woodcuts.  Crown  8vo,  6s. 

A  MANUAL  OF  MECHANICS  :  an  Elementary  Text-Book  for 
Students  of  Applied  Mechanics.  With  138  Illustrations  and  Diagrams,  and 
141  Examples  taken  from  the  Science  Department  Examination  Papers,  with 
Answers.  Fcp.  8vo,  2s.  6d, 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,  GREEN  &•  CO.  11 


HELMHOLTZ.—  WORKS   by  HERMANN  L.  F.  HELMHOLTZ, 

M.D.t  Prof essor  of  Physics  in  the  University  of  Berlin. 

ON  THE  SENSATIONS  OF  TONE  AS  A  PHYSIOLOGICAL 
BASIS  FOR  THE  THEORY  OF  MUSIC.  Second  English 
Edition  ;  with  numerous  additional  Notes,  and  a  new  Additional  Appendix, 
bringing  down  information  to  1885,  and  specially  adapted  to  the  use  of 
Musical  Students.  By  ALEXANDER  J.  ELLIS,  B.A.,  F.R.S.,  F.S.A., 
&c.,  formerly  Scholar  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge.  With  68  Figures 
engraved  on  Wood,  and  42  Passages  in  Musical  Notes.  Royal  8vo,  28j. 

POPULAR  LECTURES  ON  SCIENTIFIC  SUBJECTS.  With 
68  Woodcuts.  2  Vols.  crown  8vo,  3J.  6d.  each. 


HERSCHEL.    OUTLINES  OF  ASTRONOMY.    By  Sir  JOHN  F. 

W.    HERSCHEL,  Bart.,   K.H.,  &c,,  Member  of  the  Institute  of  France. 
Twelfth  Edition,  with  9  Plates,  and  numerous  Diagrams.     8vo,  I2J. 


HUDSON    AND    GOSSE.    THE    ROTIFERA    OR  'WHEEL 

ANIMALCULES.'  By  C.  T.  HUDSON,  LL.D.,  and  P.  H.  GOSSE, 
F.  R.  S.  With  30  Coloured  and  4  Uncoloured  Plates.  In  6  Parts.  4to,  price 
lew.  6d.  each ;  Supplement,  izs.  6d.  Complete  in  Two  Volumes,  with 
Supplement,  4to,  £4  4*. 

%*  The  Plates  in  the  Supplement  contain  figures  of  almost  all  the  Foreign 
Species,  as  well  as  of  the  British  Species,  that  have  been  discovered  since  the 
original  publication  of  Vols.  I.  and  II. 


JOUBERT.  ELEMENTARY  TREATISE  ON  ELECTRICITY 
AND  MAGNETISM.  Founded  on  Jou BERT'S  "  Traite  Elementaire 
d'Electridte."  By  G.  C.  FOSTER,  F.R.S.,  Quain  Professor  of  Physics  in 
University  College,  London ;  and  E.  ATKINSON,  Ph.D.,  formerly  Pro- 
fessor of  Experimental  Science  in  the  Staff  College.  With  381  Illustrations. 
Crown  8vo,  is.  6d.  

KOLBE.  A  SHORT  TEXT-BOOK  OF  INORGANIC  CHE- 
MISTRY. By  Dr.  HERMANN  KOLBE,  late  Professor  of  Chemistry 
in  the  University  of  Leipzig.  Translated  and  Edited  by  T.  S.  HUM- 
PIDGE,  Ph.D.,  B.Sc.  (Lond.),  late  Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Physics  in 
the  University  College  of  Wales,  Aberystwyth.  New  Edition.  Revised  by 
H.  LLOYD-SNAPE,  Ph.D.,  D.Sc.  (Lond.),  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the  Uni- 
versity College  of  Wales,  Aberystwyth.  With  a  Coloured  Table  of  Spectra 
and  66  Woodcuts.  Crown  8vo,  8s.  6d. 


LARD  EN.      ELECTRICITY    FOR    PUBLIC    SCHOOLS    AND 

COLLEGES.     With  numerous   Questions  and   Examples  with  Answers, 
and  214  Illustrations  and  Diagrams.  By  W.  LARDEN,  M.A.  Crown  8vo,  6s. 


12  GENERAL    SCIENTIFIC    WORKS 

LADD.—  WORKS  by  GEORGE    T,  LADD,  Professor  of  Philosophy  in 

Yale  University. 

ELEMENTS  OF  PHYSIOLOGICAL  PSYCHOLOGY:  A 
TREATISE  OF  THE  ACTIVITIES  AND  NATURE  OF 
THE  MIND  FROM  THE  PHYSICAL  AND  EXPERI- 
MENTAL POINT  OF  VIEW.  With  113  Illustrations.  .8vo,  price  2is. 

PSYCHOLOGY,  DESCRIPTIVE   AND    EXPLANATORY:    A 

Treatise  of  the  Phenomena,  Laws,  and  Development  of  Human  Mental  Life. 
8vo.  21  s. 

OUTLINES     OF    PHYSIOLOGICAL     PSYCHOLOGY.    With 

numerous  Illustrations.     8vo.     12s. 

PHILOSOPHY  OF  MIND  :  an  Essay  on  the  Metaphysics  of  Psychology. 
8vo,  i6s.  

LINDLEY  AND   MOORE.      THE  TREASURY  OF  BOTANY, 
OR    POPULAR    DICTIONARY    OF    THE    VEGETABLE 

KINGDOM  :  with  which  is  incorporated  a  Glossary  of  Botanical  Terms, 
Edited  by  J.  LINDLEY,  M.D.,  F.R.S.,  and  T.  MOORE,  F.L.S.  Witt 
20  Steel  Plates,  and  numerous  Woodcuts.  2  Parts,  fcp.  8vo,  price  I2j. 


MARTIN.      NAVIGATION    AND    NAUTICAL   ASTRONOMY. 

Compiled  by  Staff- Commander  W.  R.  MARTIN,  R.N.,  Instructor  in 
Surveying,  Navigation,  and  Compass  Adjustment ;  Lecturer  on  Meteorology 
at  the  Royal  Naval  College,  Greenwich.  Sanctioned  for  use  in  the  Royal 
Navy  by  the  Lords  Commissioners  of  the  Admiralty.  Royal  8vo,  i8s.  • 


MENDELEEFF.      THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    CHEMISTRY.     By 

D.  MENDELEEFF,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the  University  of  St. 
Petersburg.  Translated  by  GEORGE  KAMENSKY,  A.R.S.M.  of  the 
Imperial  Mint,  St.  Petersburg,  and  Edited  by  A.  J.  GREEN  AWAY,  F.I.C., 
Sub-Editor  of  the  Journal  of  the  Chemical  Society.  With  97  Illustrations. 
2  Vols.  8vo,  36*. 

MEYER.      OUTLINES     OF     THEORETICAL     CHEMISTRY. 

By  LOTHAR  MEYER,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the  University  of  Tubin- 
gen. Translated  by  Professors  P.  PHILLIPS  BEDSON,  D.Sc.,  and  W. 
CARLETON  WILLIAMS,  B.Sc.  8vo,  QS. 


MITCHELL.  MANUAL  OF  PRACTICAL  ASSAYING.  By 
JOHN  MITCHELL,  F.C.S.  Sixth  Edition.  Edited  by  W.  CROOKES, 
F.R.S.  With  201  Woodcuts.  8vo,  31  j.  f>d. 


MORGAN.  ANIMAL  BIOLOGY.  An  Elementary  Text  Book.  By 
C.  LLOYD  MORGAN,  Principal  of  University  College,  Bristol.  With 
numerous  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  8s.  6d. 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,   GREEN  6-   CO. 


MOSSO.  FEAR.  By  ANGELO  MOSSO.  Translated  from  the  Fifth 
Edition  of  the  Italian  by  E.  LOUGH  and  F.  KIESOW.  With  8  Illustra- 
tions. Crown  Svo,  7-r.  bd. 

*»*  This  book  deals  with  much  more  than  is  conveyed  by  the  title.  It  is, 
in  fact,  a  series  of  essays  on  the  expression  of  the  emotions,  dealing  more 
especially  with  the  painful  emotions.  Although  the  subject  is  treated  in  a 
measure  scientifically,  i.e.,  physiologically,  the  book  is  not  intended  solely  for 
the  scientific  public. 

MUIR.  THE  ALCHEMICAL  ESSENCE  AND  THE  CHEMICAL 
ELEMENT  :  an  Episode  in  the  Quest  of  the  Unchanging.  By  M.  M.  PATTI- 
SON  MUIR,  Fellow  of  Gonville  and  Caius  College,  Cambridge.  Svo.  4*.  6d. 


ODLING.  A  COURSE  OF  PRACTICAL  CHEMISTRY,  Arranged 
for  the  use  of  Medical  Students,  with  express  reference  to  the  Three  Months' 
Summer  Practice.  By  WILLIAM  ODLING,  M.A.,  F.R.S.  With  71 
Woodcuts.  Crown  Svo,  6s. 


OSTWALD.  SOLUTIONS.  By  W.  OSTWALD,  Professor  of  Chemistry 
in  the  University  of  Leipzig.  Being  the  Fourth  Book,  with  some  additions, 
of  the  Second  Edition  of  Ostwald's  "  Lehrbuch  der  Allgemeinen  Chemie." 
Translated  by  M.  M.  PATTISON  MUIR,  Professor  of  Gonville  and  Caius 
College,  Cambridge.  Svo,  lew.  6d. 


PAYEN.  INDUSTRIAL  CHEMISTRY;  A  Manual  for  use  in  Tech- 
nical Colleges  or  Schools,  also  for  Manufacturers  and  others,  based  on  a 
Translation  of  Stohmann  and  Engler's  German  Edition  of  PAYEN'S  Precis  de 
Chimie  Industrielle.  Edited  and  supplemented  with  Chapters  on  the  Chemistry 
of  the  Metals,  &c.,  by  B.  H.  PAUL,  Ph.D.  With  698  Woodcuts.  Svo,  42^. 


PROCTOR.— WORKS  by  RICHARD   A.  PROCTOR. 


OLD  AND  NEW  ASTRO- 
NOMY. By  RICHARD  A. 
PROCTOR  and  A.  COWPER 
RAN  YARD.  With  31  Plates  and 
472  Illustrations.  Text.  410,  2U. 

LIGHT  SCIENCE  FOR 
LEISURE  HOURS  ;  Familiar 
Essays  on  Scientific  Subjects, 
Natural  Phenomena,  &c.  3  Vols. 
crown  Svo,  5J.  each. 

THE  ORBS  AROUND  US  ;  a 
Series  of  Essays  on  the  Moon  and 
Planets,  Meteors,  and  Comets. 
With  Chart  and  Diagrams,  crown 
Svo,  S.T.  Cheap  Edition,  crown 
Svo,  3^.  6d. 

OTHER  WORLDS  THAN 
OURS  ;  The  Plurality  of  Worlds 
Studied  under  the  Light  of  Recent 
Scientific  Researches.  With  14 
Illustrations,  crown  Svo,  $s. 
Cheap  Edition,  crown  Svo,  3J.  6d. 


THE  MOON  ;  her  Motions,  As- 
pects, Scenery,  and  Physical 
Condition.  With  Plates,  Charts, 
Woodcuts,  and  Lunar  Photo- 
graphs, crown  Svo,  5.?. 

UNIVERSE  OF  STARS ;  Pre- 
senting Researches  into  and  New 
Views  respecting  the  Constitution 
of  the  Heavens.  With  22  Charts 
and  22  Diagrams,  Svo.  los.  6d. 

LARGER  STAR  ATLAS  for 
the  Library,  in  12  Circular  Maps, 
with  Introduction  and  2  Index 
Pages.  Folio,  15^.,  or  Maps 
only,  izs.  6d. 

NEW  STAR  ATLAS  for  the 
Library,  the  School,  and  the  Ob- 
servatory, in  12  Circular  Maps 
(with  2  Index  Plates).  Crown 
Svo,  5-r. 

f  Continued. 


GENERAL  SCIENTIFIC  WORKS 


PROCTOR.—  WORKS  by  RICHARD  A.  PROCTOR— continued. 


THE  STUDENT'S  ATLAS. 
In  12  Circular  Maps  on  a  Uni- 
form Projection  and  I  Scale, 
with  2  Index  Maps.  Intended  as 
a  -vade-mecum  for  the  Student 
of  History,  Travel,  Geography, 
Geology,  and  Political  Economy. 
With  a  letter-press  Introduction 
illustrated  by  several  cuts.  5J. 

OTHER  SUNS  THAN  OURS  : 

a  Series  of  Essays  on  Suns — Old, 
Young,  and  Dead.  With  other 
Science  Gleanings,  Two  Essays 
on  Whist,  and  Correspondence 
with  Sir  John  Herschel.  With 
9  Star-Maps  and  Diagrams. 
Crown  8vo,  6s. 

HALF-HOURS  WITH  THE 
TELESCOPE  :  a  Popular  Guide 
to  the  Use  of  the  Telescope  as  a 
Means'of  Amusement  and  Instruc- 
tion. With  7  Plates.  Fcap.  8vo, 
2s.  6d. 

THE  SOUTHERN  SKIES: 
a  Plain  and  Easy  Guide  to  the 
Constellations  of  the  Southern 
Hemisphere.  Showing  in  12 
Maps  the  position  of  the  principal 
Star-Groups  night  after  night 
throughout  the  year.  With  an 
Introduction  and  a  separate  Ex- 
planation of  each  Map.  True  for 
every  Year.  410,  5-r. 

HALF-HOURS  WITH  THE 
STARS  :  a  Plain  and  Easy  Guide 
to  the  Knowledge  of  the  Con- 
stellations. .Showing  in  12  Maps 
the  position  of  the  principal  Star- 
Groups  night  after  night  through- 
out the  Year.  With  Introduction 
and  a  separate  Explanation  of 
each  Map.  True  for  every  Year. 
4to,  3-r.  6ct. 

ELEMENTARY  PHYSICAL 
GEOGRAPHY.  With  33  Maps 
and  Woodcuts.  Fcp.  8vo,  is.  6d. 

LESSONS  IN  ELEMENTARY 
ASTRONOMY ;  with  Hints  for 
Young  Telescopists.  With  47 
Woodcuts.  Fcp.  8vo,  is.  6d. 


EASY  LESSONS  IN  THE 
DIFFERENTIAL  CALCU- 
LUS :  indicating  from  the  Outset 
the  Utility  of  the  Processes  called 
Differentiation  and  Integration. 
Fcp.  8vo,  2s.  6d. 

THE  STARS  IN  THEIR  SEA- 
SONS. An  Easy  Guide  to  a 
Knowledge  of  the  Star  Groups,  in 
12  Large  Maps.  Imperial  8vo,  S.T. 

STAR  PRIMER.  Showing  the 
Starry  Sky  Week  by  Week,  in  24 
Hourly  Maps.  Crown  410,  2s.  6d. 

ROUGH  WAYS  MADE 
SMOOTH.  Familiar  Essays 
on  Scientific  Subjects.  Crown, 
3*  6rf. 

HOW  TO  PLAY  WHIST: 
WITH  THE  LAWS  AND  ETI- 
QUETTE OF  WHIST.  Crown 
8vo,  3-r.  6d. 

HOME  WHIST  :  an  Easy  Guide 
to  Correct  Play.  i6mo,  is. 

OUR  PLACE  AMONG  INFI- 
NITIES. A  Series  of  Essays 
contrasting  our  Little  Abode  in 
Space  and  Time  with  the  Infini- 
ties around  us.  Crown  8vo,  $s. 

STRENGTH  AND  HAPPI- 
NESS. Crown  8vo,  5*. 

STRENGTH:  How  to  get  Strong 
and  keep  Strong,  with  Chapters 
on  Rowing  and  Swimming,  Fat, 
Age,  and  the  Waist.  With  9  Il- 
lustrations. Crown  8vo,  2s. 

THE  EXPANSE  OF  HEAVEN. 

Essays  on  the  Wonders  of  the 
Firmament.  Crown  8vo,  5J- 
Cheap  Edition,  crown  8vo,  $s.  6d. 

THE  GREAT  PYRAMID,  OB- 
SERVATORY, TOMB,  AND 
TEMPLE.  With  Illustrations. 
Crown  8vo,  5-r. 

PLEASANT JWAYS      IN 

SCIENCE.      Crown     8vo,     5^. 

Cheap  Edition,  crown  8vo,  3^.  6d. 

[Continued. 


PUBLISHED  BY  LONGMANS,  GREEN  &  CO. 


PROCTOR.—  WORKS  by  RICHARD  A.   PROCTOR— continued. 


MYTHS  AND  MARVELS  OF 
ASTRONOMY.  Crown  8vo,  5*. 
Cheap  Edition,  crown  8vo,  3-f.  6^ 

CHANCE  AND  LUCK  ;  a  Dis- 
cussion of  the  Laws  of  Luck, 
Coincidences,  Wagers,  Lotteries, 
and  the  Fallacies  of  Gambling, 
&c.  Crown  8vo,  2s.  boards, 
2s.  6d.  cloth. 


NATURE  STUDIES.  By 
GRANT  ALLEN,  A.  WILSON, 
T.  FOSTER,  E.  CLODD,  and 
R.  A.  PROCTOR.  Crown  8vo,  5^. 
Cheap  Edition,  crown  8vo,  3^.  f>d. 

LEISURE  READINGS.  ByE. 
CLODD,  A.  WILSON,  T.  FOSTER, 
A.  C.  RUNYARD,  and  R.  A. 
PROCTOR.  Crown  8vo,  3*.  f>d. 


REYNOLDS.    EXPERIMENTAL  CHEMISTRY  for  junior  students. 

By  J.  EMERSON  REYNOLDS,  M.D.,  F.R.S.,  Professor  of  Chemistry,  Univ. 

of  Dublin.     Fcp.  8vo,  with  numerous  Woodcuts. 

PART  I. — Introductory,  is.  6d.       PART  III. — Metals  and  Allied  Bodies,  3.?.  6d. 
PART  II. — Non-Metals,  2s.  &/.      PART  IV. — Chemistry  of  Carbon  Compounds,  4?. 

SLINGO    AND    BROOKER.     ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERING 

FOR  ELECTRIC-LIGHT  ARTISANS  AND  STUDENTS. 
(Embracing  those  branches  prescribed  in  the  Syllabus  issued  by  the  City  and 
Guilds  Technical  Institute.)  By  W.  SLINGO  and  A.  BROOKER.  With 
346  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  izr. 


SMITH.  GRAPHICS;  OR,  THE  ART  OF  CALCULATION 
BY  DRAWING  LINES,  applied  to  Mathematics,  Theoretical  Me- 
chanics and  Engineering,  including  the  Kinetics  and  Dynamics  of  Machinery, 
and  the  Statics  of  Machines,  Bridges,  Roofs,  and  other  Engineering  Structures. 
By  ROBERT  H.  SMITH,  Professor  of  Civil  and  Mechanical  Engineering, 
Mason  Science  College,  Birmingham. 

PART  I.  Text,  with  separate  Atlas  of  Plates — Arithmetic,  Algebra, 
Trigonometry,  Vector,  and  Locor  Addition,  Machine  Kinematics,  and  Statics 
of  Flat  and  Solid  Structures.  8vo,  15*. 


SORAUER.  A  POPULAR  TREATISE  ON  THE  PHYSIOLOGY 

OF  PLANTS.  For  the  Use  of  Gardeners,  or  for  Students  of  Horticulture 
and  of  Agriculture.  By  Dr.  PAUL  SORAUER,  Director  of  the  Experimental 
Station  at  the  Royal  Pomological  Institute  in  Proskau  (Silesia).  Translated 
by  F.  E.  WEISS,  B.Sc.,  F.L.S.,  Professor  of  Botany  at  the  Owens  College, 
Manchester.  With  33  Illustrations.  8vo,  gs.  net. 


THORPE.      A    DICTIONARY    OF    APPLIED    CHEMISTRY. 

ByT.  E.  THORPE,  B.Sc.  (Viet),  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.,  Treas.  C.S.,  Professor  of 
Chemistry  in  the  Royal  College  of  Science,  London.  Assisted  by  Eminent 
Contributors.  To  be  published  in  3  vols.  8vo.  Vols.  I.  and  II.  £2  2s.  each, 
Vol.  III.  £3  3*.  

TUBEUF.      DISEASES     OF     PLANTS     DUE    TO     CRYPTO- 

GAMIC    PARASITES.       Translated  from  the  German  of  DR.   CARL 

FREIHERR  VON  TUBEUF,  of  the  University  of  Munich,  by  WILLIAM 

•  G.  SMITH,  B.  Sc.,  Ph.D.,  Lecturer  on  Plant  Physiology  to  the  University  of 

Edinburgh.     With  over  300  Illustrations.  [/« preparation. 


j6  GENERAL  SCIENTIFIC  WORKS. 

TYNDALL.—  WORKS  by  JOHN  TYNDALL,  F.K.S.,  frc. 
FRAGMENTS  OF  SCIENCE.     2  Vols.    Crown  8vo,  16*. 
NEW  FRAGMENTS.     Crown  8vo,  icw.  6d. 
HEAT  A  MODE  OF  MOTION.     Crown  8vo,  izs. 
SOUND.     With  204  Woodcuts.     Crown  8vo,  IOJ.  6d. 
RESEARCHES   ON  DIAMAGNETISM  AND  MAGNE-CRYS- 

TALLIC    ACTION,     including  the  question  of  Diamagnetic  Polarity. 

Crown  8vo,  12s. 
ESSAYS    ON    THE    FLOATING-MATTER    OF    THE     AIR 

in  relation  to  Putrefaction  and  Infection.     With  24  Woodcuts.     Crown  8vo, 

7-r.  6d. 
LECTURES  ON    LIGHT,  delivered    in    America    in    1872    and    1873. 

With  57  Diagrams.     Crown  8vo,  $s. 

LESSONS  IN  ELECTRICITY  AT  THE    ROYAL  INSTITU- 
TION, 1875-76.     With  58  Woodcuts.     Crown  8vo,  2s.  6d. 
NOTES    OF    A    COURSE    OF    SEVEN    LECTURES     ON 

ELECTRICAL  PHENOMENA  AND   THEORIES,  delivered  at 

the  Royal  Institution.     Crown  8vo,  is.  6d. 
NOTES  OF  A  COURSE  OF  NINE  LECTURES   ON  LIGHT, 

delivered  at  the  Royal  Institution.     Crown  8vo,  u.  6d. 
FARADAY  AS  A  DISCOVERER.     Crown  8vo,  3*.  U. 

THE  GLACIERS  OF  THE  ALPS  :  being  a  Narrative  of  Excursions 
and  Ascents.  An  Account  of  the  Origin  and  Phenomena  of  Glaciers,  and  an 
Exposition  of  the  Physical  Principles  to  which  they  are  related.  With 
numerous  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  6s.  6d.  net. 


WATTS'  DICTIONARY  OF  CHEMISTRY.  Revised  and  entirely 
Re-written  by  H.  FORSTER  MORLEY,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  Fellow  of,  and  lately 
Assistant-Professor  of  Chemistry  in,  University  College,  London  ;  and  M.  M. 
PATTISON  MUIR,  M.A.,  F.R.S.E.,  Fellow,  and  Prselector  in  Chemistry, 
of  Gonville  and  Caius  College,  Cambridge.  Assisted  by  Eminent  Contributors. 
To  be  Published  in  4  Vols.  8vo.  Vols.  I.  II.  42*.  each.  Vol.  III.  50*. 
Vol.  IV.  63*.  

WEBB.  CELESTIAL  OBJECTS  FOR  COMMON  TELESCOPES. 
By  the  Rev.  T.  W.  WEBB,  M.A..  F.R.A.S.,  Vicar  of  Hard  wick,  Hereford- 
shire. Fifth  Edition,  Revised  and  greatly  Enlarged  by  the  Rev.  T.  E. 
ESPIN,  M.  A. ,  F.  R.  A.  S.  (Two  Volumes. ) 

VOL.  I.  With  Portrait  and  a  Reminiscence  of  the  Author,  2  Plates,  and 
numerous  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  6s. 

VOL.  II.     With  Illustrations  and  Map  of  Star  Spectra.     Crown  8vo,  6s.  6d. 


WRIGHT.  OPTICAL  PROJECTION  :  A  Treatise  on  the  Use  of  the 
Lantern  in  Exhibition  and  Scientific  Demonstration.  By  LEWIS  WRIGHT, 
Author  of  "Light:  a  Course  of  Experimental  Optics."  With  232  Illustra- 
tions. Crown  8vo,  6s. 

5000.4.96.  BRADBVRY,    AGNEW,   &  CO.    LD.,    PRINTERS,   WHITEFRIARS. 


DATE  DUE  SLIP 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  MEDICAL  SCHOOL  LIBRARY 


2m-5,'31 


5"*1  *"^  **  ,     r  \ 

^•0\t   '  •>'